2017 Dodge Challenger Owner`s Manual - Dealer E

2017 Dodge Challenger Owner`s Manual - Dealer E
2017
OWNER’S MANUAL
Challenger
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . . .6
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship,
distinctive styling, and high quality.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read
these publications carefully. Following the instructions and
recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols
that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this
Owner’s Manual:
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front
corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number
also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure
Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle
registration, and the title.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
VIN Location
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located on
the right front strut tower inside the engine compartment.
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . . .10
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Replacement Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Customer Key Fob Programming . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ Key Fob Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .20
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ How To Use Remote Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Remote Start Abort Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . .15
8 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Cancel Remote Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY . . . . .25
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Auto-Down Feature — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .30
䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .69
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
includes a key fob and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
2
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
ON/RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead battery. In
this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the engine START/
STOP button and push to operate the ignition.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
Key Fob
The key fob also contains an emergency key, which stores
in the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. The
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the glove
compartment. You can keep the emergency key with you
when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the key fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob
When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to
remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the
chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display in
the cluster.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to ten minutes after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission
into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking
brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs
from vehicle, and lock all doors.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key fobs from vehicle, place the ignition in the OFF
position and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a Remote Keyless Entry key fob, a Keyless
Push Button Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that
are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to
crank if an invalid key fob is used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds
if an invalid key fob is used to start the engine.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Key Fobs
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once an key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
serviced, bring all vehicle key fobs with you to the authorized dealer.
Customer Key Fob Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors and
trunk for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for
unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and decklid release
are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle
security alarm will provide the following audible and
visible signals: the horn will pulse, the headlights will turn
on, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the
vehicle security light in the instrument cluster will flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the system will turn off the horn after approximately 29 seconds, turn off all of the visual signals after
five seconds, and then the system will rearm itself up to
eight times.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the OFF
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And
Operating⬙ for further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry, make sure the vehicles keyless ignition
system is OFF.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry, make sure the vehicle ignition system is
OFF, and the key is physically removed from the
ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push the lock button on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
equipped, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙
for further information).
• Advance the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security
alarm.
• The vehicle security alarm remains armed during power
trunk entry. Pushing the trunk button will not disarm
the vehicle security alarm. If someone enters the vehicle
through the trunk and opens any door, the alarm will
sound.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the vehicle security alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
vehicle security alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob
to unlock the doors or open any door.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all key fob buttons
for all key fobs.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy
lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the
“Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position).
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
The Remote Keyless Entry system allows you to lock or
unlock the doors, open the trunk, or activate the Panic
Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held key fob. The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
Key Fob
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door or twice within five seconds to
unlock all doors.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” under “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
To Lock The Doors
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” under “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the unlock
button on the key fob. To change the current setting, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Flash Lights With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked with the key fob. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the key fob. The time for
this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through
Uconnect. To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors. The turn signal lights will flash, and the horn will
chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are
locked with the key fob. This feature can be turned on or
turned off. To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
To Unlatch The Trunk
Push the trunk button on the key fob two times within five
seconds to unlatch the trunk.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” under “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Using The Panic Alarm
Programming Additional Key Fobs
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the Panic button on the key fob for at least one second and
release. When the Panic Alarm is activated, the turn signals
will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior
lights will turn on.
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you
turn it off by either pushing the Panic button a second time
or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or
greater.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Alarm
is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will
remain on.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic
Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the
system.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
Emergency Key Removal
Separating Key Fob Case
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal
during removal.
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on
the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
NOTE:
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob may
reduce this range.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
How To Use Remote Start
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
• PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle security alarm not active
• Ignition in OFF position (Keyless Enter-N-Go)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The instrument cluster message stays active until the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
parking lights will flash, and horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present, the vehicle will start and
then shut down 10 seconds later.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the key fob. However, the ignition must be activated by
pushing the keyless ignition button twice (or the ignition
must be placed in the ON/RUN position) before you can
repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
• Any engine warning lights come on.
Push and release the Remote Start button one time or allow
the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
• The hood is opened.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system will
disable the one time push of the Remote Start button for
two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
• The gear selector is moved out of PARK.
• Low Fuel Light turns on.
• The hazard switch is pushed.
• The brake pedal is pushed.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
General Information
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock
the vehicle using Passive Entry via the door handles, and
disarm the vehicle security alarm (if equipped). Then, prior
to the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the
keyless ignition button.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
NOTE: In vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
— Ignition feature, the message “Remote Start Active Push Start Button” will display. This message will clear
once the START button is pushed.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
Cancel Remote Start
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following
occur:
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
DOOR LOCKS
WARNING!
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the door
lock knob on each door trim panel upward.
Door Lock Knob
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the
door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission
into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking
brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs
from vehicle, and lock all doors. and lock your
vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
(Continued)
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is on, and either door is open, the power locks will not
operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the
key fob in the vehicle. Turning off the ignition or closing
the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open
with the ignition either cycled to ACC or RUN (engine not
running), a chime will sound as a reminder.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto
door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer. The auto door lock feature is enabled/
disabled in the Uconnect Settings.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically if:
Power Door Lock Switch
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry system. Refer to
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
3. The transmission is in PARK.
NOTE:
4. The driver door is opened.
• Passive Entry may be programmed on or off; refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming — If
Equipped
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in
accordance with local laws.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock
or unlock buttons.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and
if equipped will arm the security alarm.
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle
Passive Entry system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices
may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
Passive Entry handle from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver door handle, grab the front driver door handle to
unlock the driver’s door automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition is in the OFF position.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s
door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
handle to unlock both doors automatically. The interior
door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any passive entry vehicle.
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob
while a door is open.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle
while a door is open.
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
Passive Entry key fob inside the car, and it does not find
any Passive Entry key fobs outside the car, the car will
unlock and alert the customer.
2
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected outside the vehicle.
The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the
following conditions are true:
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the vehicle
and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry door
handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
To Enter The Trunk:
With a Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the deck
lid, push the button located on the center of the light bar
which is located on the deck lid above the license plate.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry key fob in the trunk and try to close the deck lid, the
deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless another one of
the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs is outside the vehicle
and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the deck lid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push
the door handle lock button to lock both doors.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob
lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s
interior door panel.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
2
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control both of
the door windows.
Power Window Switches
There is a single window control on the passenger’s door
trim panel that operates the window on the passenger’s
door. The window controls will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Auto-Down Feature — If Equipped
• The Ignition Off Power Delay feature will allow the power
windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when either front
door is opened. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The driver’s door power window switch and passenger
door power window switch have an auto-down feature.
Push the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically.
• The door window will lower slightly if it is closed
completely when opening the door. The window will
return to its fully closed position after closing the door.
This action allows the door to open without resistance
and prevents window and seal damage.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
To open the window part way, push the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
The power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening
either door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature
is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pushing the trunk release button. The button is located on
the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate. If equipped with a manual transmission, the vehicle speed must be under 5 mph (8 km/h)
before the button will operate.
Trunk Release
Button
The trunk lid can be released from
outside the vehicle by pushing the
trunk release button on the key fob
twice within five seconds or by using the external release switch located on the underside of the decklid overhang. The release feature
will function only when the vehicle
is in the unlock condition.
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the
trunk open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key
removed from the ignition switch, the trunk open symbol
will display until the trunk is closed.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in the
trunk, young children may not be able to escape, even
if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped in the
trunk, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency release
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-in-the-dark
handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
Trunk Internal Emergency Release Lever
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) should be secured in a vehicle
with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning
booster seats. Older children who do not use child
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride
properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “If You
Need Consumer Assistance” section for customer service contact information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
(Continued)
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer immediately and have it
fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
(Continued)
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
WARNING! (Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
2
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant,
it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that
is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch
is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the
ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and
the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which
could affect the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the
fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to
alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has
come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains
on while driving have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately. For additional information regarding
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light, refer to the “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” section of this
manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag
covers.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
Front Air Bags And Knee Impact Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
(Continued)
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side
of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The
front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events,
in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by
the seat belts and body structure.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the SABIC
and its deployment path are located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
side impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side
Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In
the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover
event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate,
the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
Air Bag System Components
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
(Continued)
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any
child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper
restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/
parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or younger
and who have not reached the height or
weight limits of their child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their forwardfacing child restraint, but are too small to
properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
out-grown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a fivepoint Harness, facing forward in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rearfacing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forwardfacing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way
back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Seat Belt + Top
Anchors Only
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Tether Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This
Vehicle
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
weight of the child restraint) for using the
combined weight of the child and the child
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
restraint?
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than
65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
be used together to attach a rear-facing or
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
forward-facing child restraint?
Can two child restraints be attached using a
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two
common lower LATCH anchorage?
or more child restraints. If the center position
does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the
back of the front passenger seat?
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed?
No
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the
rear of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating
position located in the panel between the rear
seatback and the rear window. They are found
under a plastic cover with the tether anchorage
symbol on it.
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rearfacing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
Center Seat LATCH
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the
seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do
not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt,
do not install a child seat in that outboard position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing The
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
(Continued)
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child reusing the seat belt to install a forstraint) for using the Tether Anchor
ward facing child restraint, up to the
with the seat belt to attach a forward
recommended weight limit of the
facing child restraint?
child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
Contact between the front passenger
touch the back of the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is alseat?
lowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed?
No
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
seating position with an ALR retracpath of the child restraint?
tor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
For vehicles equipped with the 3.6L or 5.7L use the
following engine break-in recommendations:
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant
installed at the factory is high-quality and energyconserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be
consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under
which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended
viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty. Please check your
oil level with the engine oil indicator often during the
break in period. Add oil as required.
For vehicles equipped with the 6.4L use the following
engine break-in recommendations:
Despite modern technology and World Class manufacturing methods, the moving parts of the vehicle must still
wear in with each other. This wearing in occurs mainly
during the first 500 miles (805 km) and continues through
the first oil change interval.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
It is recommended for the operator to observe the following driving behaviors during the new vehicle break-in
period:
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km):
• Do not perform sustained operation with the accelerator
pedal at wide open throttle.
• Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an
extended period of time.
• Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than
halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km):
• Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting manually
(paddles or gear shift) at higher rpms when possible.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
For the first 1500 miles (2414 km):
• Do not participate in track events, sport driving schools,
or similar activities during the first 1500 miles (2414 km).
NOTE: Check engine oil with every refueling and add if
necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher
through the first oil change interval.
• Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than
halfway to avoid rapid acceleration in lower gears (1st to
3rd gears).
SAFETY TIPS
• Avoid aggressive braking.
NOTE: Never transport passengers in the cargo area.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
Transporting Passengers
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
(Continued)
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” for further
information.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Defroster
Seat Belts
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not
on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If
the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
your floor mat using
• ALWAYS securely attach
the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor
mat upside down or turn your floor mat over.
Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the
floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
before installing any
FROM THE VEHICLE
other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
(Continued)
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
(Continued)
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and reinstalled, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . . .79
▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .85
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
▫ Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment . . . . .97
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
▫ Manual Front Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Vanity Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
▫ Passenger Seat Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
▫ Rear Cross Path — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . . .102
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
▫ Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
3
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
䡵 MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . .111
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . .116
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .116
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . . .121
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . .122
▫ Turning FCW On Or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
▫ To Activate/Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Changing FCW Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Service FCW Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . . .127
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . . .130
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC. . . . . . . . .132
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . . .135
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Operation . . .138
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
▫ ParkSense Warning Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .145
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .146
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
3
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .150
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . . . .150
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . . .154
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . .159
▫ Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ Front Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .157
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .158
▫ Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . .158
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
3
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on or off
through the touchscreen.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
• Press the mirror dimmer button once to turn the feature
on.
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
SOS button.
• Press the mirror dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature off.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
(Continued)
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
Guardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be
operable if your Uconnect Access service is active and
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to
someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support for
Uconnect Access.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there
will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call system
initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call
connection, push the SOS call button on the Rearview
Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device
Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green
LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a SOS operator has been made.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the
following important vehicle information to a SOS operator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s SOS
Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
the SOS operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator should be able
to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
system will attempt to remain connected with the SOS
operator until the SOS operator terminates the
connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from an
(Continued)
3
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should exit
the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s operable network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operable network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception
is required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate
an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause
the SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket
equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or
modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT),
THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
(Continued)
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility.
• Operator error by the SOS operator.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
3
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection and a GPS signal is required
for the SOS Call system to function properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of
the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give
a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane
next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side convex mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side convex mirror.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
The mirrors are equipped with a rotational hinge. The
mirrors have one detent (clockwise) towards the rear of the
vehicle and three detent’s (counterclockwise) towards the
front of the vehicle.
3
Power Mirror Controls
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the mirror that
you want to adjust.
Folding Mirrors
Power Mirrors
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Vanity Mirrors
A vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the
mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use the
mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically.
Close the mirror cover to turn off the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with
your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the
desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun
visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the
visor and pull rearward.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
3
Slide-On-Rod Extender
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar
sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect
highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
Automatic Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE.
Manual Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
gear.
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer
before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object
(i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side
of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light
remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a
forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer
to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
3
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed
of less than 31 mph (50 km/h).
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed of
less than 16 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the
blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than 16 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent
lanes.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
3
Stationary Objects
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists,
or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the
BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal
before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Cross Path — If Equipped
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and, if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alerts, including reducing the radio volume so that the alert can be
better heard.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the
vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
RCP is not a back up aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the system
will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio volume is reduced so that the alert can
be better heard.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) volume will be reduced so
that the alert can be better heard.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced so that the alert can be better heard.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
3
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Power Seats
The power seat switches are located on the outboard side
of the front seat cushions. The power seat switches are used
to control the position of the seat.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seat Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
3
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or
rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
are also equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support.
Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support.
Pushing upward or downward on the switch will raise and
lower the position of the support.
Power Lumbar Switch
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
(Continued)
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated seat button
setting on.
once to turn the HI
• Press the heated seat button
the LO setting on.
a second time to turn
• Press the heated seat button
heating elements off.
a third time to turn the
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting
will turn off automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns
due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep
the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient
temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds: HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
• Press the ventilated seat button
choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
the ventilated seat off.
once to choose HI.
a second time to
a third time to turn
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during
a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seat, near the
floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or
rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired
position. Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause
you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly
adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust the seat
only while the vehicle is parked.
3
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Seatback Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard
side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and
release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean
forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision, you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Passenger Seat Easy Entry
On the passenger seat, pull forward on the lever located on
the side of the seatback in order to dump the seatback and
slide the seat forward. You can also temporarily remove the
seat belt from the guide loop on the seat and allow the seat
belt to retract out of the way. This allows for easier access
to the rear seat. To return the seat to a normal seating
position, first return the seatback to its original recline
location and then slide the entire seat back to the pre-set
lock position.
Recline Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Easy Entry Lever
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear
of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain
additional clearance to the back of your head.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact, the RHRs will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants head
and the RHR.
3
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not return to
their normal position, see your authorized dealer immediately.
To remove the head restraint, remove the seat belt from the
seat belt loop. Raise the head restraint as far as it can go.
Then, push the adjustment button and the release button at
the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into
the holes while pushing the adjustment button and release
button. Then, adjust it to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3 — Seat Belt Loop
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located at the base of the head restraint and push
downward on the head restraint.
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. Pull on the loops located on the
upper part of the rear seatback to fold down either or both
seatbacks. These loops can be tucked away when not in
use.
3
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and, by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
Folding Rear Seatback Loop
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position)
should not be used as a play area by children when
the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously
injured in a collision. Children should be seated and
using the proper restraint system.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
Folded Rear Seat
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
(Continued)
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of
the instrument panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
3
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, the safety catch is
located under the center front edge of the hood.
Hood Safety Catch Location
3. Push the safety catch to the left.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
Hood Safety Catch
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument
panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior
lights and fog lights.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the
OFF position. The headlight time delay can be programmed 0/30/60/90 seconds.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for
parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate
the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO
position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on after
the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in
the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to on.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The “Headlights On With Wipers” feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from high beams
to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens
will cause the system to function improperly.
• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitivity
Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle highbeam
lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of ignition
ON. System will return to default setting upon ignition
off.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to
ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
dealer.
To Activate
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position.
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is at
or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward in
vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal
operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the
system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Headlight Time Delay
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit
area with the headlight switch in the O (off) position.
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when the engine
is started and will remain on unless the headlamps are
turned to the on position, the parking brake is applied, or
the engine is shut OFF.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins when
the headlight switch is turned off.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
If you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition switch
ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable using
the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch.
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
Fog Light Switch
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights,
either push the headlight switch a second time or turn off
the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster display illuminates when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
NOTE:
Flash-To-Pass
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the instrument cluster display and a continuous chime will sound
if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three
times. Then, the turn signal (right or left) will automatically
turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the
headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to pass
position for more than 20 seconds, the high beams will shut
off.
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned on by pushing the
lens. Push the lens a second time to turn off the light. These
lights also turn on when a door is opened, when the unlock
button on the remote keyless entry key fob is pushed, or
when the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the
second detent.
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
Overhead Console
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to the
OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights were
switched on manually or are on because a door is open.
The Battery Protection also includes the glove compartment light and the trunk light. To restore interior light
operation after automatic battery protection is enabled
(lights off), either place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position or cycle the light switch.
Dimmer Controls
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the
instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if
equipped).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the
first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as
the odometer, instrument cluster display, and radio when
the position lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Instrument Panel Dimmer
The multifunction lever operates the windshield
wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC position. The multifunction
lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat (Off)
Rotate the left dimmer control downward to the O (off)
position. The interior lights will remain off when the doors
are open.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent settings
for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through
an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield
wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any
position other than off.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make
a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles
desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the
first detent position, and then turn the end of the lever to
select the desired delay interval. There are four delay
settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe interval
from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum
of approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is
10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Mist Feature
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the MIST position
to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate
until you release the multifunction lever.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
several wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever
and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned off, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles
and then turn off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if
the headlight switch is placed in the A (AUTO) position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: For vehicle equipped with rain sensor (auto
wipes), please note that in addition to the 10 seconds, the
headlights can also turn on if the Rain Sensing feature is
ON, and the front wipers complete a minimum of five wipe
cycles within 60 seconds.
In this case (auto wipes), the headlights will turn off if no
wipes occurs in 240 Seconds.
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is
especially useful for road splash or overspray from the
windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of
the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate
this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive.
Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper
sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver desires more
sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the off position when
not using the system.
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
NOTE: Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below
the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first
turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not operate
until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater
than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is
greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL
position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until
the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of the
NEUTRAL position.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward.
To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or
push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
3
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on the
steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Switch
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on for an
average of 80 minutes or more before automatically shutting off. This time will vary based on environmental
temperatures. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
the heating element on.
once to turn
• Press the heated steering wheel button
to turn the heating element off.
a second time
remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control.
“CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear on the instrument cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is on. To
turn the system off, push the on/off button a second time.
“CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will appear on the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Speed Control Buttons
1 — On/Off
2 — SET+/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET-/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
speed control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the
desired vehicle set speed.
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (–) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate
at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set a message,
“CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)”, will appear
indicating what speed was set. A cruise indicator lamp,
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
along with set speed will also appear and stay on in the
instrument cluster display when the speed is set.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button or
normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed
from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition to the
OFF position erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
touchscreen radio settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
touchscreen radio settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
To Accelerate For Passing
U.S. Speed (mph)
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed
Control function performs differently. Please refer to the
proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to
reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor
designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC
will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode is for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in
this section.
NOTE: The normal (fixed speed) cruise control will not
react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently. Always confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions
into account, and may be limited upon adverse
sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The cruise control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
The system will cancel when the vehicle speed drops below
15 mph (24 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control On/Off
2 — SET+/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET-/Decel
5 — Distance Setting Increase
6 — Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) On/Off
7 — Distance Setting Decrease
8 — CANC/Cancel
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
When the system is OFF, the instrument cluster display
will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL.
• When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
display will read “ACC Ready.”
3
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET
+ button or the SET - button and release. The instrument
cluster display will show the set speed.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be the current speed of the
vehicle.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not,
the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will show in the
instrument cluster display.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed
will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
• The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h).
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The gear selector is removed from the Drive position.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory
if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES (resume)
button. Then, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The instrument cluster display will show the last set speed.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
WARNING! (Continued)
is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET + button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
touchscreen radio settings if equipped. Refer to “ Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing the SET - button.
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET + button or SET buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed of
the vehicle.
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system applies the brake down to 15 mph
(24 km/h) when following a target vehicle.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill.
This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting will show in the instrument cluster display.
3
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set
speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same
lane, the instrument cluster display will show the “Sensed
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle
speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
3
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain
the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
Brake Alert
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action and does
not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the
ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes
the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The instrument cluster display is located
in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
appears in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
ACC SET
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the
steering wheel) is pushed, the display will read “ACC
SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument
cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
and the system will deactivate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active, Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information, refer
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor
lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the
sensor lens.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your
authorized dealer.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended.
Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW
operation.
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service ACC/FCW Warning
Offset Driving
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may
be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset
from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from
a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of
the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly.
The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving Condition Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Turns And Bends
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the
vehicle is out of the curve, the system will resume your
original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
NOTE: On tight turns, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC Hill Example
Turn Or Bend Example
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lane Changing
Narrow Vehicles
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it
may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it
is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the
lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have
moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Lane Changing Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
General Information
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the
vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising
at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without
requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control can only be operated if the
vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To change between the different control modes, push the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns
the ACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off.
Pushing of the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on/off button will result in turning on (changing to) the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will not
react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on. When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle
will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been
set, a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)”
will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will
turn on when the cruise control is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
To Decrease Speed
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:
• The brake pedal is applied.
U.S. Speed (mph)
• The CANC button is pushed.
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory
if:
the instrument cluster display), to warn the driver when it
detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings are
intended to provide the driver with enough time to react,
avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) — IF
EQUIPPED
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides
the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings (within
FCW Message
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph
(10 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW On Or Off
NOTE: The default status of FCW is on; this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
The Forward Collision activation/deactivation is located in
⬙Uconnect Settings⬙ under ⬙Safety and Driving Assistance⬙.
Forward Collision can be checked or unchecked.
When FCW is selected off, there will be an ⬙FCW OFF⬙ icon
that appears in the instrument cluster display.
Changing the FCW status to off prevents the system from
warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from one
key cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will
remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW Status
The FCW Sensitivity Settings are programmable through
the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting in the “On”
setting, this allows the system to warn you of a possible
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are
farther away. This gives you the most reaction time to
avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you when you are much closer. This setting
provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting, which
allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads:
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” in this section for limitations of this system
and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
ParkSense Sensors
ParkSense Display
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200
cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, and an obstacle has been
detected, the warning display will turn on indicating the
system status.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region
and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the sound tone will change from fast to
continuous.
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
3
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The
following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
Arc — Left
Rear
Arc — Center Rear
Arc — Right
Rear
Radio Volume Reduced
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 inches 47-39 inches
(150-120
(120-100
cm)
cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Fast
(for rear
center only)
Fast
Continuous
None
Single 1/2Second
Tone
(for rear
center only)
None
None
None
None
1st Flashing
None
6th Solid
5th Solid
4th Solid
None
None
None
None
3rd Flashing
None
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Yes
Greater
than
79 inches
(200 cm)
None
79-59 inches
(200-150
cm)
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
Yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
cluster display will feature the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or defective. The ParkSense switch LED will be off
when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed and the system is disabled or requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily and then the
LED will be on.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
ParkSense Switch
When the ParkSense system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately
five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
cycle and it will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS” or “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message for five seconds. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense
will not operate.
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
appears in the instrument cluster display, make sure the
outer surface and the inside of the rear fascia/bumper is
clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction,
and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense or render the system temporarily unavailable.
• When you turn ParkSense off in DRIVE, the instrument
cluster will display ⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙ for five seconds.
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio when it is
sounding an audio tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Ensure the ParkSense system is off if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within 12
inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be
shown in the instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The ParkView camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license
plate. The image will be displayed in the touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds,
this note will disappear.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature
and it is turned on, the rear camera image will be displayed
for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REVERSE. However, this feature is cancelled if the forward
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
shifted into PARK or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the
OFF position.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera
Delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the
last touchscreen appears again.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position. The
active guide lines will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and sunglass storage. Universal Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink) button and a power sunroof switch may also
be included, if equipped.
3
Overhead Console
Courtesy/Reading Lights
At the forward end of the overhead console are two
courtesy/reading lights.
Push the lens to turn on the light. Push it a second time to
turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when the
unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry key fob is
pushed, or when the dimmer control is turned fully
upward past the second detent.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design.
Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open.
Push on the raised bar to close.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that
operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, lighting, or home security systems. The HomeLink
unit is powered by your vehicle’s battery.
The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead
console designate the three different HomeLink channels.
The HomeLink indicator is located on the left side of the
first button.
HomeLink Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
3
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995:
These garage door openers can be identified by the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the
button that is normally used to open and close the door.
The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate,
push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling
Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” step two and follow all remaining
steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step two and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission,
which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door
or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button while
you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
Security
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
NOTE: All channels will be erased. Individual channels
cannot be erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Troubleshooting Tips
WARNING! (Continued)
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener handheld transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
(Continued)
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
3
• The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is
pushed again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close.” During Express Close
operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically
and stop when the full open position is reached. This is
called “Express Open.” During Express Open operation,
any other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch forward.
The sunroof will move forward and automatically stop at
full closed position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the
sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction
in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and release to Express
Close.
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward.
The sunroof will move rearward and automatically stop at
full open position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Pinch Protect Feature
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Sunroof Maintenance
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the front
windows closed, open the front windows together to
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” can be powered when
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the outlets
labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to the
battery and powered at all times.
The front power outlet is located next to the storage area on
the integrated center stack of the instrument panel.
These power outlets can also operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit.
NOTE:
• The front integrated center stack power outlet can be
changed from switched “ignition” to constant “battery”
powered all the time by moving the integrated center
stack fuse #12 in the Rear Power Distribution Center
from fuse location “IGN” to “B+.” Refer to “Fuses” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
• To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR cigar knob and
element must be used.
Power Outlet — Integrated Center Stack Front
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
3
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Power Outlet — Center Console
Uconnect 5.0 Power Outlet — Center Console
NOTE: All accessories connected to these powered outlets
should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in
use to protect the battery against discharge.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
1 — #12 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Integrated Center Stack
2 — #38 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
CAUTION!
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Cupholders
The front cupholders are located in the center console and
in the door panels.
Front Cupholders
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining
a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.
Door Cupholder
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are place in the cupholder,
they can spill when the door is closed, burning the
occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to avoid
injury.
Rear Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel.
3
Opened Glove Compartment
Console Storage
Glove Compartment
The center console has a storage compartment located
underneath the armrest. The compartment contains a 12
Volt power outlet, and a molded-in coin holder (designed
to hold various size coins). The center console may also be
equipped with an IPOD/USB/MP3 Control. This supports
Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and iPhone devices. Refer
to “IPOD/USB/MP3 Control – If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the
button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is
on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after
approximately ten minutes. For an additional five minutes
of operation, push the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Center Console
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a
collision.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
touchscreen or climate controls switch bank. Push
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . .170
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . .173
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . .174
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . .199
▫ Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
— Ignition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Menu
Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Performance Shift Indicator (PSI)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message
— Electrical Load Reduction Actions
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
䡵 CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .211
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
▫ Customer Programmable Features
— Uconnect 5.0 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
▫ Customer Programmable Features
— Uconnect 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
4
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 PERFORMANCE PAGES — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .247
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . . .267
▫ Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . . .267
▫ Timers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Gauges 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ Automatic Climate Control Overview . . . . . . . .269
▫ Gauges 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
▫ G-Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
䡵 PERFORMANCE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .254
▫ Launch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Drive Mode Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Default Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
䡵 IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .265
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Radio Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
▫ Introducing Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
▫ Basic Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ Navigation (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
▫ SiriusXM Guardian (8.4/8.4 NAV)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
▫ Register (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
▫ Vehicle Health Report/Alert (8.4/8.4 NAV). . . . .289
▫ Mobile App (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4/8.4 NAV). . . . . . . . . .290
▫ Apple CarPlay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Android Auto — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
4
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
Instrument Panel
1
2
3
4
— Air Outlets
— Instrument Cluster
— Glove Compartment
— Media Center
5 — Keyless Start/Stop Button
6 — Trunk Release Button
7 — Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS
4
Instrument Cluster For 3.6L Or 5.7L Engine — Base
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster For 6.4L Engine — Premium
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
•
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
4
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
The warning/indicator lights switch on in the instrument
panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic
signal when applicable. These indications are indicative
and precautionary and as such must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained
in the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving,
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
4
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
English
Metric
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the
full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake Booster, the ABS pump will
run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
NOTE: Brake Warning Light may illuminate due to excessive wear to brake pads.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD).
CAUTION!
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or
a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate,
have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition placed in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
4
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is
arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a
set threshold. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for 4 minutes, or until
the engine is allowed to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to
“If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is
running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
4
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely
stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the
light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, place the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle speed or apply light foot pressure to increase
the engine speed RPM until the Transmission Temperature light turns off.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
4
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning Light — If
Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Electric Power Steering). Refer to
“Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Trunk Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
Speed Limit Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Speed Limit Warning Light
If the vehicle speed is greater than or equal to 75 mph (120 km/h), the Speed Warning telltale
will display in the instrument cluster display, and a chime will sound with a pop up warning
message.
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the
light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical
driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
4
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If
the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned
off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
4
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
4
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 gal (7.5 L), this light will turn on and a chime will
sound. The light will remain on until fuel is added.
4
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Adaptive Cruise Control Fault Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control Fault Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the ACC is not operating and needs service. For further information,
refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on when there is a fault in the Forward Collision Warning system. Contact
your authorized dealer.
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Forward Collision Warning is off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the driver with visual and steering torque warnings when the
vehicle starts to drift out of its lane unintentionally without the use of a turn signal.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the LaneSense indicator changes
from solid green to solid yellow.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the LaneSense indicator changes from solid white/green to flashing yellow.
Refer to “LaneSense - If Equipped⬙ in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
4
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service. Please see
your authorized dealer.
Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning properly and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator Light
This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
4
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal
as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been set to a certain speed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Detected Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Detected Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control speed is SET and the target vehicle is
detected. Refer to ⬙Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped⬙ in ⬙Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle⬙ for further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target Light
This will display the distance setting for the ACC system when the system is engaged. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
4
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever
away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the
headlights back to low beam.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
White Telltale Indicator Lights
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense indicator is solid white when only the left or
right lane marking has been detected. When both lanes are detected the telltale will light up
green, and the system will be ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display
if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed control is on, but not set.
4
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has been turned on. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control ” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sport Mode Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is active. Refer to “Sport Mode — Without Performance
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display features an interactive
display which is located in the instrument cluster.
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pushing the arrow buttons
located on the left side of the steering wheel. The instrument cluster display menu items consist of the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Performance — If Equipped
4
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the left or right arrow button allows you to cycle
through the submenu items of the Main menu item.
NOTE:
• Holding the up/down or left/right arrow button will
loop the user through the currently selected menu or
options presented on the screen.
• Main menu and submenu’s wrap for continuous scrolling.
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
1 — Up Arrow Button
2 — OK Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — Left Arrow Button
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the up or down arrows allows you to cycle through
the Main Menu Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title area.
• Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu
screen viewed within that main menu will be displayed.
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer:
• Pushing the OK button changes units (mph or km/h).
For Screen Setup:
• OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus.
• Within each submenu layer, the up and down arrows
will allow the user to select the item of interest.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
• Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a
confirmation screen will appear (returning the user to
the 1st page of the submenu).
or arrow buttons. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
• Pushing the left arrow button will exit each submenu
layer and return to the main menu.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition
For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and new Performance Timers):
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display controls
for the following procedure(s):
• Information is reset by pushing and holding the OK
button.
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
Engine Oil Life Reset
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine
oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your
personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the OK
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right or left arrow button to access
the ”Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life. If
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric display will
update to show 100%. If conditions are not met a popup
message of ⬙To reset oil life engine must be off with
ignition in run⬙ will be displayed (for five seconds), and
the user will remain at the Oil Life screen.
5. Push and release the up or down arrow button to exit
the submenu screen.
4
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
• Cruise Control Ready
This telltale will illuminate white to indicate that
the Cruise Control system is activated.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
Cruise Control
This area will show reconfigurable white telltales. These
telltales include:
• Cruise Control Set
This telltale will illuminate green when the electronic speed control is set. Refer to “Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Speedometer menu is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the OK button to toggle units
(km/h or MPH) of the digital speedometer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
“Vehicle Info” menu is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the right or left arrow button to
scroll through the submenus items of “Vehicle Info.” Follow the directional prompts to access or reset any of the
following “Vehicle Info” submenu items:
• Tire Pressure Monitor
• Coolant Temp
• Trans Temp
• Oil Temp
• Oil Pressure
• Oil Life
• Battery Voltage
Performance Features — If Equipped
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Features is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the limits
of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured
by the performance pages must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
Push an release the up or down arrow button until the
Performance menu is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Push the right or left arrow button to enter the
submenus.
The Performance Features include the following:
• 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
4
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• 0-100 MPH (0-161 km/h) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
• 1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
• 1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
• Lap History
– Will list the last 5 laps with the best lap highlighted in
green.
• Top Speed
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC
system settings. The information displayed depends on
ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the
following displays in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• Braking Distance
– Distance
– From Speed
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
• Current G-Forces
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
• Peak G-Forces
• Lap Timer
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the instrument
cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• Distance Setting Change
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle.”
Fuel Economy
Two submenu pages one with Current Value (instantaneous calculation of the fuel economy) displayed and one
without the Current Value displayed (toggle the left or
right arrow button to select one):
• Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l).
• Range To Empty (miles or km).
• Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l).
• The Max and Min values will correspond to the particular engine requirements.
• Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber color
and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.
• Hold the OK button to reset average fuel economy
information.
4
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip Info
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Trip Menu item is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Toggle the left or right arrow button to select Trip
A or Trip B. The Trip information will display the following:
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Screen Setup Menu displays in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the OK button to enter the
submenus. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as
well as the location that information is displayed.
• Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
• Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 or km/l) of Trip A or Trip B since
the last reset.
• Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel
since the last reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Audio
This feature shows the audio information.
Stored Messages
This feature shows the number of stored warning messages, if any. Pushing the right or left arrow button will
allow you to scroll through the stored messages.
1. Upper Left
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty (default)
• Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
• Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• None
2. Upper Right
• Compass
• Outside Temp (default)
• Time
• Range to Empty
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
• Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
• Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• None
3. Center
• Menu Title (default)
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
• Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Audio Information
• Digital Speed
• None
4. Current Gear
• On
• Off (default)
5. Odometer
• Show (default)
• Hide
6. Gear Display
• Full (default)
• Single
7. Restore Default
• Ok
• Cancel
Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) — If Equipped
The Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) is enabled on vehicles with manual transmission, or when a vehicle with
automatic transmission is in manual shift mode. The PSI
provides the driver with a visual indication within the
instrument cluster display when the driver configured gear
shift point has been reached and the driver is still accelerating. This indication notifies the driver to change gear
corresponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit.
4
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state
of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate
that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
• The charging system is independent from load reduction. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery
Charge Warning Light” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be affected by load
reduction:
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
• Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• HVAC System
• 115V AC Power Inverter System
• Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
are larger than the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar devices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
• The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaners, game
consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
During a trip:
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V,
115V AC, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and
Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time
and parking time).
• The vehicle should have service performed if the message is still present during consecutive trips and the
evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
4
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/softwareupdate to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
For detailed information about your Uconnect 8.4 radio,
refer to the following images for the correct Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
For the below radio configuration, please refer to the
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Owner’s Manual Supplement.
4
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Data Collection & Privacy” in “Uconnect + SiriusXM Guardian” in your
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement and “Onboard
Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5.0 radio,
refer to the Uconnect 5.0 Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Refer to the Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Owner’s Manual
Supplement
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
For Canadian residents with the below radio configuration,
please refer to the Uconnect 8.4 Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Refer to the Uconnect 8.4 Owner’s Manual Supplement
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allows you to access
and change the customer programmable features.
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On
Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
Your Uconnect system may also have a power and back
buttons on the faceplate.
Push the power button on the faceplate to turn off the
Uconnect screen. Push the power button on the faceplate a
second time to turn the screen on.
Push the back button on the faceplate to exit out of a menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect
display.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Buttons On Touchscreen And
Buttons On Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen And The Faceplate
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a setting
(i.e., ON, OFF).
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 5.0
Settings
Push the MORE button on the faceplate and then press the
“Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows
you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety/
Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort,
Engine Off Options, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/
Bluetooth, Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data and System Information.
4
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, select the preferred setting option. Once the setting
is complete, either press the Back Arrow/Done button on
the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to
return to the previous menu or press the “X” button on the
touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen
will allow you to toggle up or down through the available
settings.
Setting Name
Display Mode
With Headlight On
With Headlights Off
Set Language
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen,
you may select from the available settings displayed in the
instrument cluster display, and navigation system (if
equipped). The following selectable units of measure are
listed below:
Selectable Options
Auto
+
+
Manual
–
–
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English/Français/Español)
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
Touchscreen Beep
On
Off
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the instrument cluster display, and navigation system (if
equipped). The following selectable units of measure are
listed below:
Setting Name
Units
Speed
Distance
Fuel Consumption
Pressure
Temperature
Power — If
Equipped
Torque — If
Equipped
4
Selectable Options
US
Metric
MPH
mi
MPG (US)
km/h
km
MPG (UK)
psi
°C
HP (US)
lb-ft
L/100 km
kPa
km/L
bar
°F
HP (UK)
kW
Nm
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Voice Response Length
Show Command List
Selectable Options
Brief
Always
Long
With Help
Never
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Set Time and Format
Set Date
Selectable Options
24 hour
AM
12 hour
Up Arrow
PM
Down Arrow
NOTE:
When in this display, you may set the date manually. Press the “Set Date” button on the touchscreen then press the
corresponding arrows above and below the current date to adjust.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Forward Collision Warning — If
Equipped
Selectable Options
Near
Far
NOTE:
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an audible and/or visual warning to potential forward collisions. The feature can be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This gives you
the most reaction time. To change the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near setting. This warns you of a
possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you.
Power Steering— If Equipped
Normal
Comfort
Sport
NOTE:
When your vehicle is not equipped with Performance Control, the Steering Feel Options feature will allow you to adjust the steering effort and feel. Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount of steering feel, requiring the highest amount of steering effort. Press the “Normal” button on the touchscreen to provide
greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort. Press the “Comfort” button on the touchscreen to provide a balance of steering feel and steering effort.
4
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ParkSense
Sound Only
Sound and Display
NOTE:
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and
the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects.
Rear ParkSense Chime Volume
Low
Med
High
NOTE:
The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be selected from the instrument cluster display or Uconnect System
— if equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting is
MEDIUM.
Blind Spot Alert
Off
Lights
Lights and
Chime
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects in
your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When Lights &
Chime mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
ParkView Backup Camera Active
Guidelines
On
Off
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
On
Off
NOTE:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned
ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of “REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the “Controls” button on the
touchscreen, the “settings” button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Assistance” button on the touchscreen.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
On
Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the
windshield.
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
On
Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is active.
4
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Headlight Off Delay
Selectable Options
0
30
60
90
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Illumination Ap0
30
60
90
proach
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on when the
doors are unlocked with the key fob.
On
Off
Headlights With
Wipers — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off, if
they were turned on by this feature.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
Setting Name
Auto Dim High
Beams — If
Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
Daytime Running
On
Off
Lights — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running.
Flash Lights With
On
Lock
Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob.
This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
4
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto Unlock On Exit
Flash Lights With Lock
Selectable Options
On
On
Off
Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob.
This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
Sound Horn With Lock
Off
1st Press
2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote
On
Off
Start
Remote Door Unlock
All
Driver
NOTE:
This feature will allow you to program your remote door locks to open “All doors” or only the “Driver door” with
the first push of the key fob or grabbing the Passive Entry door handle.
Passive Entry — If
On
Off
Equipped
NOTE:
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
buttons. It automatically unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is grabbed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto-On Driver Heated/
Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start
— If Equipped
Off
Selectable Options
Remote Start
All Start
4
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Headlight Off Delay
Engine Off Power
Delay
0
0 seconds
Selectable Options
30
60
45 seconds
5 minutes
90
10 minutes
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped), DVD video
system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after
the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Compass Variance
1
2
3
4
5
NOTE: Before compass calibration is performed, the compass variance zone should be set for best results.
6
Selectable Options
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
NOTE:
When the “Compass Variance” feature is selected, it allows the compass variance to be set to any number from 1 to
15 per the compass variance zone map figure.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences, the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map. Once
properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide the most
accurate compass headings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
4
Compass Variance Zone Map
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yes
Compass Calibration
NOTE:
Press “Compass Calibration” on the touchscreen to enter calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the
“Yes” button on the touchscreen and complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects). A message will appear on the touchscreen when the compass has been successfully calibrated.
Keep magnetic materials away from the rear view mirror, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This
is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false
readings.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Equalizer
Selectable Options
+
–
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+”
and “–” buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
Balance/Fade
Arrow Buttons
“C” icon
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or
use the arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
Speed Adjusted Volume
Off
1
2
3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed
Adjusted Volume press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touchscreen and select from “Off,” “1,” “2” or
“3” buttons on the touchscreen.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
On
Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound” button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
+
–
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through
the AUX input. To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset” button on the touchscreen, select “+” and
“–”.
Loudness — If Equipped
On
Off
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes. To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off”.
4
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Paired Phones/Devices
Selectable Options
List of Paired Phones/Devices
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Tune Start
Channel Skip
Selectable Options
On
Off
List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the
“Channel Skip” button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info
Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
4
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Restore Settings
Selectable Options
Yes
Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?” select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Clear Personal Data
Selectable Options
Yes
Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear, or “Cancel” to exit.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
System Information
Selectable Options
System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “System Information” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying
the system software version. You can also update your maps with a USB device. Please see your Authorized Dealer
for further information.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 8.4
Settings
NOTE:
Press the “Apps
” button, and then press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode, the Uconnect system allows
you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Language, Units, Voice,
Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors &
Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio,
Phone, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal
Data and System Information.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may
vary.
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
either press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on the
touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
4
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
up or down arrow button on the right side of the screen
will allow you to toggle up or down through the available
settings.
Setting Name
Display Mode
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Manual
+
Selectable Options
Auto
–
NOTE:
• When in the “Display Brightness With Headlights ON” display, you may select the brightness with the headlights
on.
• To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
+
–
NOTE:
• When in the “Display Brightness With Headlights OFF” display, you may select the brightness with the headlights
off. Adjust the brightness from (1–10) with the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
• To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
Setting Name
Set Theme
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When in the “Set Theme” display, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the
⬙Set Theme⬙ button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark appears showing that the setting has been selected.
AutoShow Smartphone Display Upon
onnection
Touchscreen Beep
Controls Screen Time-Out — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time Out” feature is selected, the controls screen will stay open for five seconds before the
screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In
Cluster — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the instrument cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
4
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the instrument cluster display, and navigation system (if
equipped). The following selectable units of measure are
listed below:
Setting Name
Units
Speed
Distance
Fuel Consumption
Pressure
Power — If Equipped
Temperature
Torque — If Equipped
Selectable Options
Metric
US
MPH
mi
MPG (US)
psi
MPG (UK)
kPa
HP (US)
°C
lb-ft
Custom
km/h
km
L/100 km
km/L
bar
HP (UK)
kW
°F
Nm
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Voice Response Length
Show Command List
Selectable Options
Brief
Never
Detailed
With Help
Always
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Sync Time With GPS — If
Equipped
Selectable Options
NOTE:
The “Sync Time With GPS” feature will allow you to automatically have the radio set the time.
Set Time Hours
+
–
Set Time Minutes
+
–
Time Format
12 hrs
24 hrs
Show Time In Status Bar — If
Equipped
NOTE:
The “Show Time In Status Bar” feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar.
4
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
Near
Selectable Options
Far
NOTE:
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an audible and/or visual warning to potential forward collisions. The feature can be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This gives you
the most reaction time. To change the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near setting. This warns you of a
possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you.
Steering Feel Options — If Equipped
Sport
Normal
Comfort
NOTE:
The Steering Feel Options feature will allow you to adjust the steering effort and feel. Press the “Sport” button on the
touchscreen to provide the greatest amount of steering feel, requiring the highest amount of steering effort. Press the
“Normal” button on the touchscreen to provide greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort. Press the “Comfort” button on the touchscreen to a lesser steering feel, requiring less steering effort.
ParkSense — If Equipped
Sound Only
Sound and Display
NOTE:
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle
speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other
objects. The system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
Setting Name
Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
Selectable Options
NOTE:
The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be selected from the instrument cluster display or Uconnect System.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To
make your selection, press the “Rear ParkSense Vol.” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through
ignition cycles.
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
Off
Lights
Lights and
Chimes
NOTE:
• When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When
“Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors
as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
• If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
4
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Selectable Options
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
NOTE:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned
ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of “REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into “PARK” or the
ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay, press the “Controls” button on
the touchscreen, the “settings” button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on the
touchscreen.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
NOTE:
When this feature is selected and the wipers are on, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it
senses moisture on the windshield.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
Setting Name
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is active.
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Headlight Off Delay
Headlight Illumination On Approach
Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
Steering Directed Lights
Flash Lights With Lock
0
0
Selectable Options
30
60
30
60
4
90
90
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto Unlock On Exit
Flash Lights With Lock
Sound Horn With Lock
Sound Horn With Remote Start
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
Selectable Options
Off
Driver Door
1st Press
2nd Press
All Doors
NOTE:
• When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the key fob unlock button. You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s
doors. When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
key fob unlock button.
• If the vehicle is programmed, 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter which
Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s door
opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be
used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped
NOTE:
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
buttons.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
Off
Selectable Options
Remote Start
All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Engine Off Power Delay
0 seconds
Selectable Options
45 seconds
5 minutes
10 minutes
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if equipped), DVD video
system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after
the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. To change the Engine Off Power Delay setting, press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval, and choose from “0
seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes.”
4
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name
Headlight Off Delay
0 seconds
Selectable Options
30 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to
select your desired time interval
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Balance/Fade
“Speaker” Icon
Selectable Options
Arrow Buttons
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use
the arrows to adjust, or tap the “Speaker” icon to readjust to the center.
Equalizer
+
–
NOTE:
• The “Equalizer” feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+”
and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons
on the touchscreen.
• Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly
on the desired setting.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
Setting Name
Speed Adjusted Volume
Off
Selectable Options
1
2
3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed
Adjusted Volume press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
On
Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound” button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
-3
+3
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through
the AUX input. To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match button on the touchscreen, choose a level from
–3 to +3.
Auto Play
On
Off
NOTE: The Auto Play feature allows an media device to begin playing when the media device is plugged in. To
make your selection, press the On or Off buttons to activate or deactivate Auto Play.
4
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone Settings
After pressing the “Phone Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Do Not Disturb
Selectable Options
List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto
Reply Message (custom, default) and Custom Auto Reply Message (create message).
Paired Phones and Audio Sources
List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones and Audio Sources” feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and
Audio Sources Settings system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Tune Start
Selectable Options
Channel Skip
Name of Channel
NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on
the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
Setting Name
Subscription Information
Selectable Options
Subscription Info
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Restore Settings
Ok
Selectable Options
Cancel
X
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default
setting, press the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen. A pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want
to reset your settings to default?”
4
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Clear Personal Data
OK
Selectable Options
Cancel
X
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want
to clear all personal data?”
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
System Information
Selectable Options
System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “System Information” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying
the system software version. You can also update your maps with a USB device. Please see your Authorized Dealer
for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
PERFORMANCE PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
The Performance Pages include the following:
Performance Pages is an application that provides a display for performance indicators, as received from the
instrument cluster, that will help you gain familiarity with
the capabilities of your vehicle in real-time.
• Home
To access the Performance Pages, press the “Apps” button
on the touchscreen then press the “Performance Pages”
button on the touchscreen. Press the desired button on the
touchscreen to access that specific Performance Page.
• Timers
• Gauges 1
• Gauges 2
• G-Force
• Engine
The following describes each feature and its operation:
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Pages is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the limits
of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured
by the Performance Pages must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
4
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Home
Timers
Performance Pages — Home
Performance Pages — Timers
When Home is selected, the following options will be
available:
When the Timers Page is selected, you will be able to select
from following “Tickets”:
• A series of six images which can be selected by the user.
• Current
• A left and right arrow to allow the user to scroll through
vehicle images.
Pressing the “Current” button displays a “real time” summary of performance timers.
• A short-cut to the Performance Control feature.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
• Last
Pressing the “Last” button displays the last recorded run of
performance timers.
• Best
Pressing the “Best” button displays the best recorded run
of performance timers, except for braking data.
4
• Save
Pressing the “Save” button will let you save the last run.
Any saved run over 10 will overwrite the last saved run for
Uconnect System storage. The operation of the Save feature
is listed below:
• With a USB jump drive installed, press the “USB” button
to save to the jump drive.
• Press the “Uconnect” button to save the runs to the
Owner web page.
• Press the “Cancel” button to view the last timer “Ticket”.
Performance Pages — Save
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The “Tickets” contain the timers listed below:
• ¼ Mile (400 meter) ET
• Reaction Time
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ¼ mile
(400 meters).
Measures the driver’s reaction time for launching the
vehicle against a simulated drag strip timing light (behavior modeled after 500 Sportsman Tree) displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
• ¼ Mile (400 meter) MPH
Displays the speed the vehicle was at when ¼ Mile was
reached.
NOTE: The Reaction Time, MPH, ⅛ and ¼ Mile timers will
be “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH (0 km/h).
• Brake Distance
• 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h)
Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a full
stop.
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
60 mph (0 to 100 km/h).
• 0-100 MPH (0-160 km/h)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
100 mph (0 to 160 km/h).
• ⅛ Mile (200 meter) ET
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ⅛ mile
(200 meters).
• ⅛ Mile (200 meter) MPH
Displays the vehicle speed at the time ⅛ Mile was reached.
NOTE: The distance measurement will be aborted if the
brake pedal is released or the parking brake is engaged,
before the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
• Brake Speed
Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the brake
pedal is pressed.
NOTE: Brake Distance and Speed timers will only display
⬙ready⬙ when vehicle is traveling at greater than 30 MPH
(48 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
• Oil Pressure
Gauges 1
Shows the actual oil pressure.
Gauges 2
4
Performance Pages — Gauges 1
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
• Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature.
Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (Automatic Transmission)
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Transmission Temperature (Automatic Transmission
Only)
Shows the actual transmission temperature.
G-Force
Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (Manual Transmission)
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Battery Voltage
Shows the actual battery voltage.
• Intake Air Temperature
Shows the actual intake air temperature.
Performance Pages — G-Force
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force values
(two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as steering angle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
When G-Force is selected, the following features will be
available:
• Lateral G-Force Left and Right
The lateral g-force measures the (sideways) left and right
force of the vehicle.
straight ahead position. When the steering angle value is
negative, this indicates a turn to the left, and when the
steering angle value is positive, a turn to the right.
Engine
4
• Longitudinal G-Force Fore and Aft
The longitudinal g-force measures the acceleration and
braking force of the vehicle.
• Peak G-Forces Fore Aft, Left and Right
This shows the maximum g-forces that have been achieved
since the last reset from the instrument cluster display.
Peak values are maintained through ignition cycles by the
instrument cluster display until they are cleared by the
driver.
• Vehicle Speed
Vehicle Speed measures the current speed of the vehicle in
either mph or km/h, starting at 0 with no maximum value.
• Steering Wheel Angle
Steering Wheel Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor to
measure the degree of the steering wheel relative to zero.
The zero degree measurement indicates a steering wheel
Performance Pages — Engine
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Vehicle Speed
Shows the actual vehicle speed.
• Instantaneous Horsepower/Kilowatts
Shows the instantaneous horsepower.
• Instantaneous Torque
Shows the instantaneous torque.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual engine oil pressure.
• Gear (Automatic Transmission Only)
Shows the current (or pending) operating gear of the
vehicle.
PERFORMANCE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a Performance Control
feature which allows for coordinating the operation of
various vehicle systems depending upon the type of driving behavior desired. The Performance Control feature is
controlled through the Uconnect radio and may be accessed by performing any of the following:
• Pushing the Super Track Pack button on the instrument
panel switch bank.
• Selecting “Performance Control” from the “Apps”
menu.
• Selecting “Performance Control” from within the Performance Pages menu.
You will be able to enable, disable, and customize the
functionality of the Launch Control and Drive Mode
Set-Up features within Performance Control.
Descriptions of these features are provided below. To
access information about the functionality of these features
through the Uconnect system, press the “Info” button on
the touchscreen.
Launch Mode
WARNING!
Launch Mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. It is recommended that this feature be used
in a controlled environment, and within the limits of
the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by
the performance pages must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
is not intended to compensate for lack of driver experience
or familiarity with the race track. Use of this feature in low
traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions may results in
excess wheel slip outside this systems control resulting in
an aborted launch.
NOTE:
• Launch Mode should not be used on public roads.
Always check track conditions and the surrounding
area.
• Launch Mode is not available for the first 500 miles of
the vehicle’s life.
• Launch Mode should only be used when the engine and
transmission are at operating temperature.
Launch Mode
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Mode system that
is designed to allow the driver to achieve maximum
vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Mode is a
form of traction control that manages tire slip while
launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use
during race events on a closed course where consistent
quarter mile and zero to sixty times are desired. The system
• Launch Mode is intended to be used on dry, paved road
surfaces only. Use on slippery or loose surfaces may
cause damage to vehicle components and is not recommended.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Launch Control is only available when the following
procedure is followed:
1. Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen, select
“Performance Control”, and press the “Launch Mode”
4
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
button on the touchscreen or push the Super Track Pak
button on the integrated center stack switch bank.
2. To adjust the Launch RPM, press and drag the slider bar,
or press the arrows on the touchscreen, to adjust the
holding RPM. Press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen when finished. The setting will be saved.
NOTE: The default RPM for launch mode is a preset
factory value. Optimal launch RPM will depend on the
engine and tires on the vehicle, as well as the road and
weather conditions. Not all RPM settings will be usable in
all configurations and scenarios. If requested launch RPM
is not attainable in a given scenario, the engine will provide
the maximum amount of torque possible to get as close as
possible to the requested RPM.
6. While holding the brake, rapidly apply the accelerator
pedal to wide open throttle. The engine speed will hold
at the RPM that was set in the “Launch RPM Set-up”
screen.
NOTE: Messages will appear in the instrument cluster
display to inform the driver if one or more of the above
conditions have not been met.
7. When conditions four through six have been met, the
instrument cluster display will read “Launch Ready
Release Brake.” Release the brake and continue to hold
wide open throttle to launch.
8. Keep the vehicle pointed straight. Launch Control will
be active until the vehicle reaches 62 MPH (100 km/h).
3. Press the “Activate Launch Mode” button on the touchscreen.
Launch Control will abort before launch completion and
display “Launch Aborted” in the instrument cluster display for any the following conditions:
4. Ensure the vehicle is not moving and the steering wheel
is pointing straight.
• The accelerator pedal is released during launch.
5. Hold the brake pedal and verify the vehicle is in a
forward transmission gear.
• The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer
moving in a straight line.
• The “ESC OFF” button is pressed to change the system
to another mode if Launch Control is enabled.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Launch Control is only available when the following
procedure is followed:
1. Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen, select
Performance Control, and press the “Launch Control”
button on the touchscreen or push the Super Track Pak
button on the center stack switch bank.
2. To adjust the Launch RPM, press and drag the slider bar
or press the arrows on the touchscreen to adjust the
holding RPM. Press the back arrow button when finished. The setting will be saved.
NOTE: The default for launch control is 3000 RPM. Optimal launch RPM will depend on the engine and tires on the
vehicle, as well as road and weather conditions. Not all
RPM settings will be usable in all configurations and
scenarios. If requested launch RPM is not attainable in a
given scenario, the engine will provide the maximum
amount of torque possible to get as close as possible to the
requested RPM.
3. Press the “Activate Launch Mode” button on the touchscreen.
4. Ensure the vehicle is not moving and the steering wheel
is pointing straight.
5. Fully depress the clutch pedal and verify the vehicle is
in first gear.
6. While holding the clutch depressed, rapidly apply the
accelerator pedal to wide open throttle. The engine
speed will hold at the RPM that was set in the “Launch
RPM Set-up” screen.
NOTE: Messages will appear in the instrument cluster
display to inform the driver if one or more of the above
conditions have not been met.
7. When conditions four through six have been met, the
instrument cluster display will read “Launch Ready
Release Clutch.” Release the clutch quickly and continue
to hold wide open throttle to launch. Execute shifts as
described in the section “Manual Transmission – Shifting.”
8. Keep the vehicle pointed straight. Launch control will
be active until the vehicle reaches 62 MPH (100 km/h).
Launch Control will abort before launch completion and
display “Launch Aborted” in the instrument cluster display for any the following conditions:
• The brake is applied during launch.
4
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer
moving in a straight line.
• The “ESC OFF” button is pressed to change the ESC
system to another mode if Launch Control is enabled.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels are
spinning and do not have traction. Damage to the
transmission may occur.
Drive Mode Set-Up
Pressing the “Drive Mode Set-Up” button on the touchscreen within the Performance Control screen indicates the
real-time status of the various systems. Pressing the “Sport
Mode Set-Up” or “Default Mode Set-Up” buttons on the
touchscreen, the driver can configure their individual drive
modes and see how those configurations affect the performance of the vehicle.
NOTE: Not all of the options listed in this manual are
available on every vehicle, below is a chart with all
available Drive Mode vehicle configurations.
Available Mode Configurations
Transmission
Auto
Manual
Engine
N/A
X
Engine/Trans
X
N/A
Refer to the Sport and Default modes for their detailed
operation.
Steering
X
X
Paddle Shifters
X
N/A
Traction Control
X
X
NOTE: These settings will remain in effect when using the
Launch Control feature.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
The Paddle Shifters may be enabled or disabled while in
this mode.
Default Mode
4
Default Mode
The vehicle will always start in Default Mode. This mode is
for typical driving conditions. While in Default Mode, the
Engine, Transmission and Traction will operate in their
Normal settings and cannot be changed. The Steering assist
may be configured to Normal, Sport, or Comfort by
pressing the corresponding buttons on the touchscreen.
Default Mode Set-Up
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sport button on the instrument panel switch bank to put
the vehicle in Sport Mode and activate these settings. The
customized settings will only be active when the Sport
button is active.
Sport Mode
Sport Mode
Sport Mode is a configuration set-up for typical enthusiast
driving. The Transmission and Steering are both set to their
Sport settings. The steering wheel paddle switches are
enabled. The Traction Control defaults to Normal. Any of
these four settings may be changed to the driver’s preferences by pressing the buttons on the touchscreen. Push the
Sport Mode Set-Up
Possible Drive Mode configurations are listed below with
accompanying descriptions. The information contained in
the list below can also be accessed from within the mode
Set-Up menus. To access the information, press the “Info”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
button on the touchscreen from the mode Set-Up menu,
and use the left/right arrows to toggle through available
descriptions. The title for each system in the Set-Up menu
can be pressed, which provides the descriptions for each
function of that system.
• Sport
Engine
Press the “Norm” button on the touchscreen for standard
throttle response for normal driving.
Engine
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen for improved
throttle response for an enhanced driving experience.
• Normal
4
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• NORMAL
Engine/Trans
Press the “Norm” button on the touchscreen for a balance
of throttle response, shift comfort and economy for normal
driving.
Paddle Shifters — If Equipped With Automatic
Transmission
Engine/Trans
• SPORT
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen for improved
throttle response and modified shifting for an enhanced
driving experience.
Paddle – Automatic Transmission
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
• ON
Traction
Press the “ON” button on the touchscreen to enable
steering wheel Paddle Shifters.
• OFF
Press the “OFF” button on the touchscreen to disable
steering wheel Paddle Shifters.
4
Traction Control
• SPORT
Press the “SPORT” button on the touchscreen to turn off
traction control and reduce stability control.
• NORMAL
Press the “NORM” button on the touchscreen to provide
full traction control and full stability control.
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• NORMAL
Steering
Press the “Norm” button on the touchscreen to provide a
balanced steering feel and steering effort. This is also your
vehicles pre-set steering setting.
• COMFORT
Press the “Comf” button on the touchscreen to provide a
lower steering effort.
Steering
• SPORT
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide an
increased amount of steering feel, requiring a higher
amount of steering effort.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
Located in the front storage area of the center console, this
feature allows an iPod/MP3 player, or an external USB
device, to be connected to the audio system.
4
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV USB/AUX Ports
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Jack
3 — USB Port
Uconnect 5.0 USB/AUX/SD Card Ports
1 — Aux Jack
2 — USB Port
3 — SD Card Slot
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and
iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully
support the iPod control features. Please visit Apple’s
website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/AUX etc.).
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand control is
different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.
Media Mode
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track
on the selected media (AUX, Bluetooth, SD Card). Pushing
the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of
the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track
if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to
play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
Under certain conditions, an “on” mobile device in your
vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your
radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is not
harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not
satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it
is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or
off during mobile device operation when not using
Uconnect (if equipped).
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
USA/CANADA
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 inches (20 centimeters) or further from
the human body.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Regulatory And Safety Information
4
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
CLIMATE CONTROLS
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, airflow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician for
help.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
Automatic Climate Control Overview
4
Uconnect 5.0 Automatic Climate Controls
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Automatic Climate Controls
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
NOTE: Icons and descriptions can vary based upon vehicle equipment.
Icon
Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
4
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon
Description
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
When toggling the Front Mode Defrost button, the climate system will return to the previous
setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button
on the faceplate, or touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate, or touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on
the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
Icon
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen
Buttons
Panel Mode
Description
SYNC Button
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The Sync indicator is
illuminated when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while
in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
4
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon
Bi-Level Mode
Floor Mode
Mix Mode
Description
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Controls off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of
the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is
on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
4
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity,
or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate
interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button.
The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button
is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead
to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature
may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out)
if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls,
the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED
in the control button to blink and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature
is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable feature. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in this section of the
manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. DEFROST mode
must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side
glass.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. Refer
to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance Procedure” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in fresh air
with the blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost on
the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the
front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode
without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. When
this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
4
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Outside Air Intake
A/C Air Filter
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake is
clear of ice, slush and snow.
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally
filtered out. Refer to “Maintenances Procedure” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather
Conditions
4
Control Settings Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions Chart
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the
main menu bar, will now be an active App/shortcut.
NOTE: This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 or 8.4/8.4
NAV system.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Main Menu
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an
existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
Uconnect 5.0
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is located in the headliner and aimed at the driver.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the Apps
menus, of your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 8.4
NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 8.4 system.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the
beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
4
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the top of the
touchscreen.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions. For
8.4/8.4 NAV Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions.
3 — Push To End Call
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
Uconnect 5.0
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say
“Help.” The system will provide you with a list of
commands.
4
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV
Radio
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to AUX
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command
must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Radio
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player
optional and not available on all vehicles.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
Uconnect 5.0 Media
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
button
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work.”
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Media
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
following commandsѧ
. After the beep, say one of the
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Phone
Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free
and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Climate
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
Navigation (8.4/8.4 NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the
Uconnect 8.4 system.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
beep, say:
4
. After the
• For the 8.4 Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4 NAV Uconnect System, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
. After
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Navigation
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SiriusXM Guardian (8.4/8.4 NAV) — If Equipped
WARNING!
Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including SOS Call
and Roadside Assistance Call will NOT work without
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compatible with your device.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian services in the next
section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started.
NOTE: SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
SOS Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Send & Go
Vehicle Finder
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call
Vehicle Health Reports**
Vehicle Health Alert**
Performance Pages Plus**
**If vehicle is equipped.
Register (8.4/8.4 NAV)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your
vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian Customer Care agent who will activate services in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate
on the web.
For further information, please visit siriusxm.com/
guardian.
4
Vehicle Health Report/Alert (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Your vehicle will send you a monthly email report, which
summarizes the performance of your vehicle’s key systems
so you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance
needs. Your vehicle will also send you Vehicle Health
Alerts when it detects issues with its key systems that need
your attention. For further information go to the Owner
Site website (owners.dodge.com, or owners.chrysler.com).
Mobile App (8.4/8.4 NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite music in your car.
To use the SiriusXM Guardian App:
• Download the SiriusXM Guardian App to your mobile
device.
• Press the Info button on the navigation bar at the bottom
of the app for Vehicle Info.
Mobile App
• Press the Remote button on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app to Lock/Unlock, Remote Start, and
activate your horn and lights remotely.
• Press the Location button on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app to bring up a map to locate your
vehicle or send a location to your vehicle’s navigation
system.
• Press the Settings button in the upper left corner of the
app to bring up app settings and access the Assist Call
Centers.
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
For
further
DriveUconnect.com.
information
please
visit
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check
a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM
Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. (Not
available for 8.4 system or vehicles sold in the Canadian
market.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
SiriusXM Travel Link
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact
with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your
iPhone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of
the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning
cable, and press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple
CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel, or press and hold the “Home” button within Apple
CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice
commands to use a list of your iPhone’s features:
4
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
• Additional Apps
Apple CarPlay
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Android Auto — If Equipped
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with
Android’s best-in-class speech technology through your
vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your Android powered smartphone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or
higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factoryprovided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon
that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to
begin Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone” icon
within Android Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which
recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
• Maps
Android Auto
• Music
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
• Phone
• Text Messages
• Additional Apps
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
General Information
Additional Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877855-8400(24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800465-2001(English) or 1-800-387-9983(French)
SiriusXM Guardian services support, call:
1-844-796-4827
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ 1–4 Skip Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .299
▫ Downshifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . .299
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED .308
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
▫ Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .309
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . .309
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
▫ After Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
䡵 AUTOSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .303
䡵 SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE
CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . .304
䡵 ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . . .318
▫ Six-Speed Manual Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . .304
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . . .318
▫ Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
▫ Acceleration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
▫ Traction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
5
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . .334
䡵 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4L ENGINES
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
▫ Rain Brake Support (RBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .322
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .323
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . .324
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). . . . . .325
▫ Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . .338
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . . .339
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . .340
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . .345
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . . .347
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ 3.6L Engine — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ 5.7L Engine (With Automatic Transmission) . . . .364
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ 5.7L Engine (With Manual Transmission) . . . . . .364
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ 6.4L Engine — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . .355
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles. . . . . . . . .366
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . .357
▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . . . .366
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
5
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . . .370
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
▫ Common Towing Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . .380
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
(Continued)
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in NEUTRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting vehicle.
This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition
system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to
the floor.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into
any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed.
(Continued)
5
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Tip Start Feature
Cycle the ignition switch to START position and release it.
The starter motor will continue to run, and will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running. If the
engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, cycle the ignition switch
to the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate
the ignition switch with the push of a
button, as long as the ENGINE START/
STOP button is installed and the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is in
the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button —
Automatic Transmission Only
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle.
If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button — Manual
Transmission Only
1. Press and hold the clutch pedal while pushing and
holding the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. Release the button when the engine starts. If the vehicle
fails to start within 15 seconds, release the button, wait
10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
3. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, release the button.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
pushes in a row and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition
switch position will remain in the ACC position until the
vehicle is stopped, placed in PARK and the button is
pushed twice to the OFF position. If the gear selector is
not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP button is
pushed once, the instrument cluster will display a
“VEHICLE NOT IN PARK” message and the engine will
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK
position, or it could roll.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button — Automatic Transmission
Only
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button — Manual Transmission Only
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
1. With the vehicle stopped, place the gear selector in
NEUTRAL, then push and release the ENGINE START/
STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. Place the gear selector in first gear or REVERSE and then
apply the parking brake.
5
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position, the
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position.
• If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position, the
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h) and the
engine is not running.
• If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short pushes in a row before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
the ACC position until the vehicle is stopped, placed in
park and the button is pushed twice to the OFF position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions — With Driver’s Foot
OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC and RUN.
To change the ignition switch positions without starting the
vehicle and use the accessories, follow these steps starting
with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to change
the ignition switch to the ACC position,
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position,
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition switch to the OFF position.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
WARNING! (Continued)
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button) — Automatic Transmission
Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures,
it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press and hold
the brake pedal, press the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and hold it, then push and release the ENGINE
START/STOP button once. The starter motor will engage
automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then disengage.
Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the
brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button) — Manual Transmission Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures,
it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press and hold
the clutch pedal, press the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and hold it, then push and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button for no more than 15 seconds. Release
the accelerator pedal and the clutch pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
5
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that is
located near the air box.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Six-Speed Manual Transmission
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle
unattended without having the parking brake fully
applied. The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an
incline.
CAUTION!
• Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control System/Hill Start Assist” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
• Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor
may cause increased shift efforts, and may result in
damage to the clutch and transmission.
• Do not rest your hand on the gear selector while
driving, as this may result in transmission synchronizer damage.
• Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear
wheels are spinning due to loss of traction. Damage
to the transmission may occur.
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms
up. This is normal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
5
Manual Shifter
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As you release the
clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. Damage to
the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not fully
press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator pedal
when shifting.
Shift Pattern
The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that
centers the gear selector near third and fourth gear. This
spring helps you know which gear you are in when you are
shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to second or
downshifting from sixth to fifth.
The spring will try to pull the gear selector toward third
and fourth gear. Make sure you move the gear selector into
second or fifth gear. If you let the gear selector move in the
direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from first to
fourth or from sixth to third gear.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete stop
before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so may
result in transmission damage.
You must always use first gear (or REVERSE) when
starting from a standing position.
Recommended Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel
economy, it should be upshifted as listed in recommended
shift speed chart.
Axle Ratio
3.90
MANUAL TRANSMISSION RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS
1-4
4-5
mph
20
37
(km/h)
(32)
(59)
Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions (relatively steady
speeds) may result in increased fuel economy.
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
acceleration rate.
5-6
48
(77)
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse
inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help
prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete stop,
you may notice lighter shift efforts into REVERSE with
the ignition switch in the ON position (RUN position for
Keyless Enter-N-Go), as compared to the ignition LOCK
position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go). This is
normal operation of the transmission reverse inhibitor
system.
• Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain,
you may hear your transmission. This can be most
noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with
the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it may
also be heard when driving at low engine RPM. Also,
this may be more noticeable when the transmission is
warm. This is a normal condition and is not an indication of a problem with your clutch or transmission.
1–4 Skip Shift
In Default or Street Drive Modes, there are times when you
must shift the transmission directly from first gear to
fourth gear instead of from first gear to second gear. This is
to help you get the best possible fuel economy from your
vehicle. This occurs when the engine coolant (antifreeze) is
higher than 106°F (41°C), vehicle speed is greater than
19 mph (30 km/h) but less than 21 mph (34 km/h), and the
transmission is in first gear, and the accelerator is at ¼
throttle or less.
NOTE: The 1 - 4 Skip Shift feature is disabled when
selecting Sport Mode. Refer to “Performance Control — If
Equipped” in the “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
section for further descriptions of this mode.
After you shift the transmission to fourth gear, you can
press the clutch in and shift to another forward gear.
Downshifting
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, downshift
to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep grade.
WARNING!
Skipping more than one gear while downshifting,
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You
could have a collision.
5
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
• If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high an engine speed, you could
damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
• Do not downshift into first gear when the vehicle is
moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), as you could
damage the engine and/or clutch.
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and
turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the
OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the
driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
OFF mode.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the gear selector in
PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and the
brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both
on the gear selector and in the instrument cluster.
To select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear
selector and move the selector rearward or forward. To
shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed. You must
also press the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL into
DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift
Interlock System” in this section). Select the DRIVE range
for normal driving.
5
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL (Autostick) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the Autostick shift control
(refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further information). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+)
while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (beside the
DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc.
Automatic Transmission Gear Selector
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are selfcalibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward)
it is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick, +/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position). In MANUAL (AutoStick)
mode, the transmission gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster (as M1, M2, M3, etc.). Move the gear selector to the
right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK,
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the ignition OFF.
• Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
(Continued)
5
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and
turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the
OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
(Continued)
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
gear selector and firmly move the selector all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
• With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
(refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further information)
to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a
lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
5
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or below), transmission operation may be modified depending
on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
MANUAL (M)
message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of
the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may
be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps.
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE position) enables full manual control of transmission shifting
(also known as AutoStick mode; refer to “AutoStick” in this
section for further information). Toggling the gear selector
forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
(AutoStick) position will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc.
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
Transmission Limp Home Mode
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns
OFF.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle
performance may be severely degraded and the engine
may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not
re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift
the transmission to NEUTRAL.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
in the MANUAL (M) position, tap the gear selector forward (-) (or tap the (-) shift paddle on the steering wheel,
if equipped) to downshift the transmission to the next
lower gear, or tap the lever rearward (+) (or tap the (+) shift
paddle, if equipped) to command an upshift.
AUTOSTICK
5
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the
vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also
provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the DRIVE (D) position, the
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
the eight available gears. To activate AutoStick, move the
gear selector into the MANUAL (M) position (beside the
DRIVE position). The current transmission gear will be
displayed in the instrument cluster, along with a highlighted ⬙M⬙ (Manual) indication. When the gear selector is
Shifter Paddles
1 — (–) Shift Paddle
2 — (+) Shift Paddle
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift
paddles (+/-), if equipped, while the gear selector is in
DRIVE, will activate a temporary AutoStick mode. Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the
transmission to the next lower gear, while tapping (+) to
enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear. The
current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster,
but the ⬙M⬙ will not be highlighted. The transmission
will revert back to normal operation (if the gear selector
remains in DRIVE) after a period of time, depending on
accelerator pedal activity.
• In some models, the shift paddles may be disabled (or
re-enabled, as desired) using Drive Mode Set-Up, accessed by selecting Performance Control (or Drive
Modes, for SRT models) from the Apps menu in the
Uconnect screen.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down
when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver (using the
gear selector, or the shift paddles [if equipped]), unless an
engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will
remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below.
• In temporary AutoStick mode (gear selector in DRIVE),
the transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached. If the accelerator is fully
depressed, the transmission will downshift when possible
(based on current vehicle speed and gear, except 6.4L and
SRT models). Lack of accelerator pedal activity will cause
the transmission to revert to automatic operation.
• If normal AutoStick mode is engaged (gear selector in
MANUAL position), manual gear selection will be maintained until the gear selector is returned to DRIVE, or as
described below. The transmission will not upshift automatically at redline in this mode, nor will downshifts
be obtained if the accelerator pedal is pressed to the
floor.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second gear.
Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or
icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed (if equipped), or
holding the gear selector in the (-) position, will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the
current speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault
or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift paddle
(if equipped, and the gear selector is already in DRIVE)
until “D” is once again indicated in the instrument cluster.
You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE
CONTROL
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature. This
mode is a configuration set up for typical enthusiast
driving. The engine, transmission (when equipped with
automatic transmission), and steering systems are all set to
their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will provide improved
throttle response and modified shifting for an enhanced
driving experience, as well the greatest amount of steering
feel. This mode may be activated and deactivated by
pushing the Sport button on the instrument panel switch
bank.
NOTE: If equipped with a manual transmission, the 1 - 4
Skip Shift Feature is disabled in SPORT Mode.
5
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
For vehicles equipped with Drive Modes or a “SUPER
TRACK PAK” button, refer to “Performance Control — If
Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an active on-demand AllWheel Drive (AWD) system which makes available optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and
driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by
automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear
wheels as necessary.
To maximize fuel economy, your AWD vehicle automatically defaults to rear-wheel drive (RWD) when road and
environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental
conditions require increased levels of road traction, the
vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode. Automatic
AWD operation could be activated by outside temperature,
wheel slip, or other predetermined conditions (there may
be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel slip
condition occurs). AWD can also be manually selected by
activating AutoStick mode (+/-), engaging Sport Mode or
activating the windshield wipers for an extended period of
time. Drive mode, RWD or AWD, can be found in the
instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: If the “SERVICE AWD SYSTEM” warning message
appears after engine start up, or during driving, it means
that the AWD system is not functioning properly and that
service is required. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size
may cause failure of the front differential and/or the
transfer case.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving)
wheels.
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions
should be observed:
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
• Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the
amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved
handling.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path’s surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
5
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions and
Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light
efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it
from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer
the vehicle manually.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to ”Customer Programmable Features” or “Performance Control — If
Equipped” within “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is
displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” or the “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF –
SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed within
the instrument cluster, this indicates the vehicle needs to be
taken to the dealer for service. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4L ENGINES
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off
four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load and
cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver
inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
5
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
PARK or REVERSE (manual transmission only) position.
When the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch
is in the ON position (RUN position with Keyless EnterN-Go), the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster
will illuminate.
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission
is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If
vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting
to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
Manual Transmission Parking Brake Release
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park
brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time
and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
Automatic Transmission Parking Brake
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position of an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the ⴖOFFⴖ mode. Remove
the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
When the keyless ignition is in the “OFF” mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
(Continued)
5
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the automatic transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. There
will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may
be evident by increased pedal travel during application,
greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the “Brake Warning Light”.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
OFF), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high performance
braking system. The brake pads are a semi-metallic compound, which offer superior fade resistance for consistent
operation. A compromise to using this type of brake pad is
that the brakes may produce more brake dust and may
squeal slightly under certain weather and operating conditions (i.e., during light brake applications). This is considered normal conditions.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), and Rain Brake Support (RBS).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come
on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
5
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
(Continued)
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake System
Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, have the light repaired as soon
as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING! (Continued)
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the
brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
(Continued)
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
5
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Driver door must be closed.
WARNING! (Continued)
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your
(Continued)
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake
or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle. Also,
be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the instrument cluster display, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with the instrument cluster
display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within twenty
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed
properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
5
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS
and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
WARNING! (Continued)
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
5
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described
(Continued)
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
NOTE:
• For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, a momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Multiple
momentary button pushed may be required to return to
ESC On.
• ⬙ESC Sport⬙ and ⬙ESC Track⬙ (if equipped) are ESC
partial off mode(s).
Full Off – If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only
and should not be used on any public roadways. In this
mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch for
five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF”
message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC
ON again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE: System may switch from ESC Full Off to Partial
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed. When
the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined speed the
system will return to ESC Full Off.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes – if
equipped.
WARNING!
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
system is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in
maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
• With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
WARNING! (Continued)
Off” mode is only intended for off-highway or
off-road use.
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC
OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has
been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
5
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
WARNING! (Continued)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the
available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
(Continued)
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach
full braking during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver.
The EBC will prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in
wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of
brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are
in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is active,
there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
NOTE:
Tire Markings
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its
load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed
limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
5
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety
standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
WARNING!
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
• Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions. Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
WARNING! (Continued)
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure. Unequal tire
pressures can cause steering problems. You could
lose control of your vehicle. Over-inflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Always
drive with each tire inflated to the recommended
cold tire inflation pressure.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And Operating”,
or the Tire Information Supplement, located in your Owner’s Information kit.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded. Refer to “Vehicle Loading” in
“Starting And Operating”, or the Tire Information Supplement located in your Owner’s Information kit, for further
information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer
towing.
5
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg, and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING! (Continued)
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
(Continued)
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
5
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear
CAUTION!
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
judgement when determining proper
may look properly inflated even when
inflated.
a good quality
make a visual
inflation. Tires
they are under-
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
5
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Types
WARNING!
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure
adversely affect the safety and handling of
designation or
sidewall. Use
to do so may
your vehicle.
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service Kit” section
located in your Owner’s Information kit for further information.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode, it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded at full
capacity, or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
5
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
5
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
• Driving style.
Replacement Tires
• Tire pressure – Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicator” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
Life Of Tire
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance
schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
5
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer
or original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only.
• Due to limited clearance, P235/55R18 tire with a Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile traction
device or equivalent is recommended.
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
5
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
Tire Rotation
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
WARNING!
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the
5
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale
Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and
the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30
psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPM Telltale Light
will still be ON. In this situation, the TPM Telltale Light
will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed
for use on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to
a poor overall system performance or sensor damage.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
CAUTION! (Continued)
Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to
assure proper TPM feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealership to have your sensor
function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the TPM sensor.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
NOTE:
Premium System
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
5
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire
pressure is low in one or more of the four active
road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
“Inflate to XXX” message and a graphic showing the
pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure
values shown in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module.
• Four TPM sensors.
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the instrument cluster.
• TPM Telltale Light.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition (those
shown in a different color in the instrument cluster
graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as shown in the “Inflate to XXX”
message. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the graphic
display in the instrument cluster will return the pressure
values shown to their original color, and the “TPM Telltale
Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
Service TPMS Warning
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which
sensor is not being received.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the “TPM Telltale Light” will no longer flash,
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer
display, and a pressure value will display in place of the
dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “TPM
Telltale Light” will remain ON and a chime will sound.
In addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will
still display the low pressure values in a different color
and an “Inflate to XXX” message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument
5
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in
the instrument cluster will display a new pressure value
instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when
installing Winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle. To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped
with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive
the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and the
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure values. Beginning with the next ignition switch
cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or flash the TPM
telltale and display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
in the instrument cluster display but dashes (--) will remain
in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the “TPM Telltale
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn
off, and the instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message. The instrument cluster will also
display pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition switch cycle the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
General Information
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
3.6L Engine — If Equipped
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded “Regular”
gasoline having an octane rating of 87 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of higher octane “Premium” gasoline will not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in
these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
5
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
5.7L Engine (With Automatic Transmission)
5.7L Engine (With Manual Transmission)
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded gasoline having a posted octane number
range of 87 to 89 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane
“Plus” gasoline is recommended for optimum performance
and fuel economy.
This engine is designed to meet all emission regulations, provide optimal fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded “Premium” gasoline having a posted octane number of
91 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
The use of 91 or higher octane “Premium” gasoline is required for in this engine.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and may void or
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
6.4L Engine — If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all emission regulations, provide optimal fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded “Premium” gasoline having a posted octane number of
91 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
The use of 91 or higher octane “Premium” gasoline is required for in this engine.
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and may void or
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause
the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
5
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
Materials Added To Fuel
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion, and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
MMT In Gasoline
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of Top Tier Detergent
gasoline
is
recommended.
Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
5
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
• Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left
side of the vehicle. Use a finger to pull open the door. If the
gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is
for use with this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Cap
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities
into the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on
if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the
gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the instrument
cluster. If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly
and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the
message. If the problem continues, the message will appear
the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
5
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the
“Vehicle Certification Label”. This information should be
used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load
must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the
drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of vehicle
• Month, Day, and Hour of manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear
GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if
either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels,
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and
rear GAWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle
is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it
is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on
the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the
brakes operate.
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to
the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and
GAWRs.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles
used for trailer towing.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
5
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
the trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Trailer Sway Control
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
The trailer sway control is supported by a mechanical
telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch
receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides
adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion
to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while
traveling.
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and
should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
3.6L Automatic
5.7L Automatic
6.4L Automatic
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Max. Tongue Wt.
Wt.)
12 sq ft (1.11 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
12 sq ft (1.11 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Frontal Area
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer
is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
5
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross
the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
(Continued)
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK. Always block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer
wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard.
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for the proper inspection
procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have a collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
(If Equipped)
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur
while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control to
manually select a lower gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat build up. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
AutoStick
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
5
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3”
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary
to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME,
ETC.)
Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or
using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the
ground.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . .382
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . .399
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .383
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . . .384
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . .385
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . .387
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .391
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . . .392
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Jacking And Changing A Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . .407
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . . .407
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . .408
6
382 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic
of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off
the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 383
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over
and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.
6
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Description
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can
be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Location
384 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the Black
Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to
inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when
selecting this mode.
Tire Service Kit Components
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Sealant Bottle
Deflation Button
Pressure Gauge
Power Button
5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the Tire Service Kit)
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn
on the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power Button
(4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 385
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a
Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and
Hose Replacement”.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on
the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump
Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in
the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only
intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your tire.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire
application use and need to be replaced after each use.
Always replace these components immediately at your
original equipment vehicle dealer.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
6
386 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service
Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
• If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
• If the tire has any sidewall damage.
• If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
• If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
• If the wheel has any damage.
• If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
sources.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty
of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water.
Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 387
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in
Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition in the
OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Sealant
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the
fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the valve
stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails)
from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning on the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the gear selector in NEUTRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
6
388 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant
Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position and not
Air Mode. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on the Tire
Service Kit.
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds).
As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the engine is running before turning on the
Tire Service Kit.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and the
pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump
Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 389
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument
panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting
your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can
also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service
Kit components which may cause permanent damage
to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have
the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop to
Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw
the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve stem.
6
390 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the
vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Bottle
(1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of it
accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 391
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that
the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the front
of the housing. Push the bottle into the housing. An
audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked
into place.
Torque Specifications
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage
area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m)
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
22 mm
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
6
392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
Torque Patterns
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack and
spare tire.
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to access
the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
6
Spare Tire Fastener
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
Opening The Access Panel
394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Jack Fastener
6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from under
the spare tire. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the
lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack
assembly.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (automatic transmission) or first gear (manual transmission).
5. Turn off the ignition.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block
the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE or FIRST gear.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
6
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.
NOTE: If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide the
jack on its side and rotate it up into position.
Jack Engagement Locations
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap
covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the center
cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to loosen,
but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat
tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while
the wheel is still on the ground.
Front Jacking Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
6
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and
install the spare tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
Mounting Spare Tire
398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for additional warnings, cautions,
and information about the spare tire, its use, and
operation.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base of
the jack faces the front of the vehicle before tightening
down the fastener.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
10. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
proper lug nut torque.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
WARNING!
4. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
proper lug nut torque.
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
CAUTION!
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jumpstarting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
6
400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift into PARK (automatic transmission) or FIRST GEAR (manual transmission) and
cycle the ignition to OFF.
Remote Battery Posts Locations
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 401
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
WARNING!
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6
402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission, push
and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then shift
back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or FIRST GEAR and REVERSE (with
manual transmission), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts
between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at
wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE
or REVERSE.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode before
rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information. Once
the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again
to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
(Continued)
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE / FIRST GEAR and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
6
404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the
parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured
vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those
in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a
Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual
Park Release lever.
Console Storage Bin
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the tether
strap up through the opening in the console base.
4. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the
lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing it
to the right.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405
6
Locking Tab
5. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and
rearward until it locks in place in the vertical position.
The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be moved.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
Tether Strap
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side)
rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
down, to its original position, until the locking tab snaps
into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
Reinstall the console storage bin.
406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels OFF
The Ground
NONE
Wheel Lift Or
Dolly Tow
Front
Flatbed
RWD MODELS
AWD MODELS
NOT ALLOWED
Rear
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
NOT RECOMMENDED (but, if
used, same limitations as above)
NOT RECOMMENDED
ALL
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
NOT ALLOWED
NOT RECOMMENDED, but, if used:
• Ignition in ON/RUN mode
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
(NOT in PARK)
BEST METHOD
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to ⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section
for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out
of PARK for towing.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 407
CAUTION!
• DO NOT use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to
⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section for instructions on
shifting the automatic transmission to NEUTRAL when
the engine is off.
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30
miles (48 km) , then the only acceptable method of towing
is with a flatbed truck.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, AWD
models can also be towed with the ignition in the ON/
RUN mode, the transmission in NEUTRAL (not in PARK!),
and the rear wheels OFF the ground with no limitation on
speed or distance. Since the ignition MUST be in the
ON/RUN mode to tow in this manner, AWD vehicles must
be towed with ALL FOUR wheels OFF the ground (e.g. on
a flatbed truck) if the key fob is unavailable.
6
408 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
• Towing this vehicle using any other method can
cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage.
• Damage from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . .411
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . .412
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .414
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Clutch Hydraulic System — Manual Transmission
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . .436
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . .437
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped . . . . . . .438
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
7
410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Appearance Care And Protection
From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . .445
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
▫ Fluid Capacities — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . .449
▫ Fluid Capacities — 5.7L Automatic
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Fluid Capacities — 5.7L Manual Transmission . .461
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Fluid Capacities — 6.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Park/Turn Lamp — Models With Halogen
Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, And
Park/Turn Lamp — Models With High Intensity
Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped . . . .459
▫ Engine — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ Chassis — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
▫ Engine — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
▫ Chassis — 5.7L Automatic Transmission . . . . . .464
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Chassis — 5.7L Manual Transmission . . . . . . . .465
▫ Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Engine — 6.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ Center Tail/Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Chassis — 6.4L Automatic Transmission . . . . . .466
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . . .459
▫ Chassis — 6.4L Manual Transmission . . . . . . . .466
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
Engine Oil Fill
6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
8 — Air Cleaner Filter
9 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
10 — Engine Oil Dipstick
414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing,
see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
(Continued)
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices — If
Equipped With Uconnect 8.4 Radio” and “Uconnect CyberSecurity” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your
Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and “Cybersecurity”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the instrument
cluster. If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly
and press the Trip Odometer button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, or recently had a dead battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON mode, but do not crank or
start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
7
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition to the ON mode, you
will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you cycle the ignition
OFF or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the
designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the
use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a
flush is needed because of component malfunction,
use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level — 3.6L Engine
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform
repairs and service when necessary could result in
more costly repairs, damage to other components or
negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as once a month. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off.
(Continued)
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the
7
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of oil when the reading
is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil — 3.6L and 5.7L Engine
Checking Oil Level — 5.7L and 6.4L Engine
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the
oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range on
these engines.
Change Engine Oil — 6.4L Engine
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichever occurs first.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
Engine Oil Selection — 3.6L and 5.7L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil Selection — 6.4L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN.
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic
SAE 0W-40 engine oil or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been
certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
7
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil
meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use SAE
5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel Saver
Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 6.4L Engine
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 5.7L Engine
Use Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 engine or equivalent Mopar oil
meeting the FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all
operating temperatures.
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
Shaker Hood — If Equipped
Shaker Hood Oil Filler
For vehicles equipped with a “Shaker Hood”, the upper
scoop will need to be removed so that oil can be properly
added to the engine.
To do this, you will need follow the procedure below:
1. Remove the four nuts with the Shaker tool located in
glove compartment.
3. Fill a bucket with warm clean water to the depth
matching the filter media measurement and add a mild
household detergent or air filter cleaning solution.
4. Without allowing the solution to flow back into the
inside of the air filter, submerge the filter media in to the
water and let it soak for ten minutes.
5. Empty the bucket filled with dirty water and repeat
steps 3 and 4.
2. Lift off the upper scoop.
6. Refill the bucket with clean warm water and rinse the
filter by rotating the filter.
NOTE: Be sure to clean off all debris around or inside for
the shaker assembly.
NOTE: The water should be clean with no signs of dirt in
the bucket.
3. Locate the oil fill cover in base assembly to expose the
oil fill cap.
7. Allow the filter to air dry. Re-install the filter on the
intake system once it is dry.
4. Remove oil fill cap to add oil.
Shaker Hood Removal And Cleaning
5. Re-install shaker assembly.
1. Remove the four nuts with the Shaker tool located in
glove compartment.
Shaker Hood Air filter Cleaning
1. Remove the air filter from the intake and set the filter
clamp a side.
2. Measure the length of the filter media.
2. Lift off the upper scoop.
NOTE: Be sure to clean off all debris around or inside for
the shaker assembly.
7
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Using a water and mild detergent clean the following
locations.
— The water drain slot located at the front forward edge of
the shaker assembly.
— The seals attached to the scoop and air box.
— Lower water drains located in the lower shaker assembly and air box as well as the hood interface areas for the
seals. Apply Mopar Leather, Rubber & Vinyl Protectant
after cleaning to seals.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
4. Re-install shaker assembly.
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Engine Oil Filter Selection
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil filter.
Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to assure most efficient service.
Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are
recommended.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the
trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine
compartment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
7
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
Battery Location
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
(Continued)
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for
further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R1234yf — If
Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection
Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP
(Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be performed by
authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery
and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
7
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side
of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.
Filter Access Cover
3. Remove the used filter.
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the vehicle
(text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
Access Door
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
A/C Air Filter
5. Close the filter access cover.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
7
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades
clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters) of
washer fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid”
appears in the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
(Continued)
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
7
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when
the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
WARNING! (Continued)
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
WARNING!
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh coolant.
Check the front of the radiator for any accumulation of
bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water
from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or place the ignition in the
LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-NGo). The fan is temperature controlled and can start
at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position
(RUN position for Keyless Enter-N-Go).
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO
NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN
THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
NOTE: Your vehicle’s exhaust system may be equipped
with an Electronic Exhaust Valve (EEV) system, if the
exhaust system is replaced with aftermarket products a
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will illuminate.
Cooling System
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
Cooling System — Drain Flush And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may plug
the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
7
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact your authorized dealer
for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact your local
authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant
in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is
adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between
the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine
coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
bottle. Do not overfill.
7
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if
the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the “MAX” mark
on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements
described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes,
fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a
checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
(Continued)
7
436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Clutch Hydraulic System — Manual Transmission
(If Equipped)
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated volume
of fluid within the brake system master cylinder reservoir.
In the event of leakage or wear, use only the manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
for further information.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the left
side of the transmission. The fluid level should be 1/4 inch
(6.4mm) below the bottom of the fill hole. Add fluid, if
necessary, to maintain the proper level. Refer to “Fluids,
Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or damage to the transmission. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Change Transmission Fluid
If contaminated with water, change the fluid immediately.
See your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check
your transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission
damage.
7
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
fluid level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The fluid level
should be even with the bottom of the hole. Use this plug
to add fluid as required.
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer cover
near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differential
fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level should be
even with or slightly below the bottom of the hole.
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Fluid Changes
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Rear Axle
All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped
The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and
front differential. The exterior surface of these components
should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks. Confirmed
leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in the
middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer case
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Fluid Level Check
Checking the fluid level while the vehicle is on level
ground and has been stationary for 15 minutes will improve the accuracy of the fluid level reading.
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle.
The fluid level should be 1-2.5 mm below the fill plug. Add
fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
Change Axle Fluid
The most common causes are:
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• Stone and gravel impact.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
7
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads, or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
These products and automatic car washes may damage
the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
(Continued)
7
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
Interior Care
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
• For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose Cleaner
to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh,
damp towel to remove soap residue.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
WARNING!
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with
a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
7
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts
from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions are printed on
the inside of the power distribution center cover.
Front Power Distribution Center
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
7
446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
1
2
3
Cartridge Fuse
–
40 Amp Green
50 Amp Red
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
–
–
–
–
–
–
50 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
–
Description
Fuse – Spare
Radiator Fan #1 – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
Electric Power Steering #1 – If Equipped / Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) – If Equipped
Starter
Anti Lock Brake
Anti Lock Brake
Police Ignition Run / ACC #1
Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2
All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
Intrusion MOD (300) – If Equipped / Under
Hood Lamp – Police
Horns
Air Conditioning Clutch
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Left HID – If Equipped
Right HID – If Equipped
Radiator Fan – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447
Cavity
19
Cartridge Fuse
50 Amp Red
Mini-Fuse
–
20
21
–
–
23
24
28
29
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
40 Amp Green / 20
Amp Blue – Police
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
–
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
25 Amp Clear
–
–
25 Amp Clear
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
22
–
Description
Electric Power Steering #2 – If Equipped / Radiator Fan #2 (6.2L Supercharged)
Wiper Motor
Headlamp Washers – If Equipped
Police Bat Feed #2
Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Bat Feed # 3
Police Bat Feed # 1
Police Ignition Run/ACC Feed # 3
Fuse – Spare
Transmission Control Module (Challenger/
Charger Police) / Electronic Shift Module (Challenger)
Fuse – Spare
Engine Module
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Powertrain #1
Powertrain #2
Anti-Lock Brake Module
7
448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
37
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini-Fuse
10 Amp Red
38
39
–
–
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
48
–
10 Amp Red
49
50
51
52
53
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan
–
Description
Engine Controller / Rad Fan Relays (Charger/
300) / Electric Power Steering Module (Charger/
300) / 5-Speed TCM
Airbag Module
EPS (Challenger) / EHPS (Police) / AC Clutch
Relay / Vacuum Pump Relay / Rad Fan Relays
(Challenger)
AWD Module/Front Axle Disconnect – If
Equipped
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Vacuum Pump
Adaptive Cruise – If Equipped
Fuse – Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449
Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions are printed on the inside of the power distribution
center cover.
7
Rear Power Distribution Center
CAUTION!
Opening The Access Cover
• When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
(Continued)
450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Cavity
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
–
60 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Front PDC Feed #1
Fuse – Spare
Front PDC Feed #2
Sunroof/Dome Lamp – Police
Exterior Lighting #1
Exterior Lighting #2
Interior Lighting
Power Locks
Driver Door Control Module
Passenger Door Control Module
Dual USB Center Console Rear/
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451
Cavity
Cartridge Fuse
Mini-Fuse
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
40 Amp Green
20 Amp Blue
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow – Police
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
27
31
32
33
–
–
–
–
25 Amp Clear
25 Amp Breaker
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
Description
Cigar Lighter IP – If Equipped
HVAC Blower
Left Spot Lamp – Police
Fuse – Spare
Mod Network Interface – Police
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuel Pump
Right Spot Lamp – Police
Fuel Door/Diagnostic Port
Integrated Center Stack
Tire Pressure Monitor
Cygnus Transmission Module
(Charger/300) / Electronic Shift
Module (Charger/300)
Amplifier – If Equipped
Power Seats – If Equipped
HVAC Module/Cluster
Ignition Switch/RF Hub
Module/Steering Column Lock
7
452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge Fuse
Mini-Fuse
34
–
10 Amp Red
35
36
–
–
5 Amp Tan
15 Amp Blue
37
38
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
40
41
42
43
–
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
44
–
10 Amp Red
45
–
15 Amp Blue
Description
(300) – If Equipped
Steering Column Module/Clock
(300)
Battery Sensor
Electronic Exhaust Valve – If
Equipped
Radio
Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest/
Console Media Hub
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Rear Defrost
Comfort Seat And Steering
Wheel Module (Heated Steering
Wheel/RR Heated Seats)
Park Assist / Blind Spot / Rear
View Camera
Cluster / Rearview Mirror /
Compass (Charger/300) / Humidity Sensor / Forward Facing
Camera (Lane Departure)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
Cavity
46
47
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
Mini-Fuse
–
10 Amp Red
48
–
20 Amp Yellow
49
50
51
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
52
–
10 Amp Red
53
–
10 Amp Red
54
55
56
57
58
59
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Fuse – Spare
Adaptive Front Lighting / Day
Time Running Lamps – If
Equipped
Active Suspension – (6.4L /
6.2L)
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Front Heated / Vented Seats – If
Equipped
Heated Cupholders/Rear
Heated Seat Switches – If
Equipped
HVAC Module/In Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Airbag Module
Adjustable Pedals – Police
7
454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
–
25 Amp Breaker
10 Amp Red
–
10 Amp Red
68
–
10 Amp Red
69
70
–
–
–
–
Description
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Rear Windows (Charger/300)
Airbag Module
Fuse – Spare
Rain and Light Sensor / Sunroof
/ Inside RR View Mirror / Police Run Acc Relay
Dual USB Power Outlet – R/A
Sense (Charger/300) Rear Sunshade (Charger/300) RR USB
Timer
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of
compressor damage when the system is started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
7
456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps
W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp
562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
578
Visor Vanity Lamps
A6220
Glove Compartment Lamp – If Equipped
194
Door Courtesy
562
Shift Indicator Lamp
JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457
Exterior Bulbs
Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Halogen Headlamp
Front Park/Turn Lamp
Front Fog Lamp
Front Side Marker
Tail Lamp
Stop/Turn Lamp
Rear Side Marker
Backup Lamp
Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
License
* The headlamps are a type of high-voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of this,
you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service.
Bulb Number
D3S (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) *
HIR2LL
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
H11LL
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into
a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
7
458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Park/Turn Lamp — Models With Halogen
Headlamps — If Equipped
To replace the passenger side lamps:
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlamp cover.
3. Reach behind the passenger headlamp assembly.
NOTE: The park/turn lamps can also be accessed at this
point.
4. Turn the headlamp access cap counterclockwise to remove.
5. Remove bulb by turning it counter clockwise and disconnect.
6. Install new bulb by turning it clockwise and reconnect.
7. Reinstall headlamp access cap by turning it clockwise
and then reinstall headlamp cover.
To replace the driver side lamps:
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the air cleaner filter cover by removing three
fasteners and loosening the clean air inlet clamp and
then rotate cover off to the side.
NOTE: The cover has an electrical connector that does not
need to be disconnected if the cover is rotated off to the
side.
3. Remove one fastener on the lower air box to remove and
access the rear of the headlamp assembly.
4. Reach behind the passenger headlamp assembly.
5. Remove the headlamp cover.
6. Turn the headlamp access cap counterclockwise to remove.
7. Remove bulb by turn it counter clockwise and disconnect.
8. Install new bulb by turning it clockwise and reconnect.
9. Reinstall headlamp access cap by turning it clockwise
and then reinstall headlamp cover.
10. Reinstall engine air cleaner assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, And
Park/Turn Lamp — Models With High Intensity
Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped
HID Headlamps
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of this,
you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when
the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the
lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The Side Markers must be replaced as an
assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp
The Tail/Turn and Stop Lamps use LED lamps that are not
serviceable separately. The Tail/Turn and Stop Lamps must
be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Center Tail/Backup Lamp
The Center Tail/Backup Lamp use LED lamps that are not
serviceable separately. The Center Tail/Backup Lamp must
be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly,
see your authorized dealer.
License Lamp
The License Lamp use LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The License Lamp must be replaced as an
assembly, see your authorized dealer.
7
460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fluid Capacities — 3.6L
Fuel (Approximate)
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 5W-20, API Certified
Cooling System*
Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
Metric
18.5 Gallons
70 Liters
6 Quarts
5.6 Liters
11.1 Quarts
10.5 Liters
U.S.
Metric
18.5 Gallons
70 Liters
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
14.7 Quarts
13.9 Liters
Fluid Capacities — 5.7L Automatic Transmission
Fuel (Approximate)
Automatic Transmission: 87 Octane or 89 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 5W-20, API Certified
Cooling System*
Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461
Fluid Capacities — 5.7L Manual Transmission
Fuel (Approximate)
Manual Transmission: 91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 5W-20, API Certified
Cooling System*
Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
Metric
18.5 Gallons
70 Liters
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
14.7 Quarts
13.9 Liters
7
Fluid Capacities — 6.4L
Fuel (Approximate)
91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified
Cooling System*
Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
Metric
18.5 Gallons
70 Liters
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
15 Quarts
14.4 Liters
462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine — 3.6L
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil,
and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters.
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463
Chassis — 3.6L
Component
8-Speed Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Front Axle
Rear Axle
Transfer Case
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid is
not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90 (API
GL-5).
We recommend you use Mopar OD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85
(API GL-5).
We recommend you use Mopar Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 44–
40.
7
464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine — 5.7L
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – With Automatic
Transmission
Fuel Selection – With Manual Transmission
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil,
and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters.
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
89 Octane recommended – 87 Octane acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol.
91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol.
Chassis — 5.7L Automatic Transmission
Component
8-Speed Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Rear Axle – With Automatic Transmission
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid is
not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use Mopar OD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85
(API GL-5).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465
Chassis — 5.7L Manual Transmission
Component
Manual Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Rear Axle – With Manual Transmission
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid is
not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use Mopar LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85
(API GL-5).
Engine — 6.4L
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating
conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 or equivalent
Mopar engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters.
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol.
7
466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis — 6.4L Automatic Transmission
Component
8-Speed Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Rear Axle
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid is
not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use Mopar LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85
(API GL-5).
Chassis — 6.4L Manual Transmission
Component
Manual Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Rear Axle
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid is
not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use Mopar LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85
(API GL-5).
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — 3.6L . . . . . . . . .468
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — 6.4L . . . . . . . . .473
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — 5.7L . . . . . . . . .469
▫ Maintenance Chart — 6.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Maintenance Chart — 3.6L And 5.7L . . . . . . . . .470
8
468 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — 3.6L
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence
when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message
is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
The message “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering and fill as needed.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 469
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — 5.7L
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence
when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message
is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
The message “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off-road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
8
470 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Maintenance Chart — 3.6L And 5.7L
• Check engine oil level.
Required Maintenance Intervals
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
Refer to the maintenance chart for the required maintenance intervals.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled
service
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and
park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals and replace if
necessary.
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid (All Wheel
Drive Only).
Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped).
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary.
Adjust park brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc
brakes.
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter.
Replace spark plugs.*
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
Or Years: 2
Or Kilometers:
48,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 471
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your
vehicle for any of the following: Most of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C), driving in
dusty conditions, or stop and go driving.
Inspect the transfer case fluid. Change the transfer case fluid; if
using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, offroad, or frequent trailer towing. (All Wheel Drive Only).
Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All
Wheel Drive (AWD) change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
* The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
Or Years: 2
Or Kilometers:
48,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
472 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 473
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — 6.4L
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual
must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect
your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be
needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions, such as
dusty areas and very short trip driving. Inspection and
service should also be done anytime a malfunction is
suspected.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
The message “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s oil
if it has been six months since your last oil change, even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichever
comes first.
8
474 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset. Refer to
the steps described under “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
At Each Stop For Fuel
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
for further information.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required.
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering, and add as needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 475
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
150,000
42,000
30
70,000
144,000
36,000
24
60,000
138,000
30,000
18
50,000
132,000
24,000
12
40,000
126,000
18,000
6
30,000
120,000
12,000
Or Months:
20,000
114,000
6,000
108,000
Miles:
10,000
102,000
Maintenance Chart — 6.4L
Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
scheduled maintenance.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
and boot seals, for cracks or leaks and
all parts for damage, wear, improper
looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
If using your vehicle for any of the following: dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if
necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the CV joints.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the exhaust system.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Adjust the parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
X
X
X
X
8
X
Inspect the manual transmission fluid (If
Equipped).
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the rear axle fluid.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
150,000
96,000
90
Change the manual transmission fluid (if
equipped).
X
X
X
Change the rear axle fluid if using your
vehicle for any of the following: police,
taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing.
X
X
X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if
necessary
Replace the spark plugs – 6.4L Engine **
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
120 months if not done at 150,000 miles
(240,000 km).
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
250,000
90,000
84
80,000
144,000
84,000
78
240,000
78,000
72
70,000
138,000
72,000
66
230,000
66,000
60
60,000
132,000
60,000
54
50,000
126,000
54,000
48
220,000
48,000
42
210,000
42,000
36
40,000
120,000
36,000
30
200,000
30,000
24
30,000
114,000
24,000
18
190,000
18,000
12
20,000
108,000
12,000
6
180,000
6,000
Or Months:
170,000
Miles:
10,000
102,000
476 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 477
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .483
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center. . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands. . . . . . . . . .481
9
480 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to bring the
right papers with you, as well as your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history, as this
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 481
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423-6343
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
9
482 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract
that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract
that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you require
service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 483
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
9
484 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests, and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
INDEX
10
486 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322, 324
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . . .120
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Adding Washer Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Adjust
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 97
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 97
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 408
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43, 72, 175
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter). . . . . .422
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278, 426
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . .277, 279
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424, 425
Air Conditioning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269, 276, 424
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Alarm, Panic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14, 178, 183
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
All Wheel Drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318, 438
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . .431, 460, 461
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
INDEX 487
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Automatic Door Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . .276
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309, 437, 438
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . .438, 462, 463, 464, 465, 466
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462, 463, 464, 465, 466
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . . . .314
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462, 463, 464, 465, 466
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462, 463, 464, 465, 466
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179, 423
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Keyless Key Fob Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Brake Control System, Electronic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Brake Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462, 463, 464, 465, 466
Brake, Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324, 434
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . .435, 462, 463, 464, 465, 466
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176, 324
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .69
Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455, 457
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74, 455
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460, 461
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 368
10
488 INDEX
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Car Washes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Chart, Tire Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .415
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . . .63
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . . .59
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .56
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Climate Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Cold Weather Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460, 461
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430, 433
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .431, 460, 461, 462, 464, 465
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194, 195, 197, 198
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163, 444
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .212, 213
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
INDEX 489
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417, 418
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Door Ajar Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Door Locks
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17, 23
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . .445
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . .116, 117, 120
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . . .180
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399, 400, 401
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Emission Control System Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .415
10
490 INDEX
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412, 413
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417, 418
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411, 412, 413
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .430, 462, 464, 465
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 368
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399, 400, 401
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417, 460, 461, 462, 464, 465
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419, 460, 461
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419, 420
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . .52, 408
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Ethanol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 368
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 428
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278, 426
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422, 462, 464, 465
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74, 108, 194
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462, 463, 464, 465, 466
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460, 461
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
INDEX 491
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417, 418
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Forward Collision Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363, 462, 464, 465
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462, 464, 465
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460, 461
Fueling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink). . . . . . . . . . . .150, 155
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368, 415
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370, 372
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370, 371
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising,
Or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Hazard Warning Flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . . .109
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105, 113
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
10
492 INDEX
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Headlight Washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . . .109
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 178, 180, 191, 194
Instrument Cluster Display
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Instrument Panel And Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
iPod Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
iPod/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392, 395
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399, 400, 401
Key Fob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . .13, 18
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . .18
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . .18
Key Fob, Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Key-In Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
INDEX 493
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25, 300
Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . .17, 222, 240
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222, 240
Unlock From The Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Lane Change And Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74, 455
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74, 104
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43, 72, 175
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176, 324
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 149
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194, 195, 197, 198
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108, 109
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104, 459
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105, 113
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 149
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . .183
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 149
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . . .111
10
494 INDEX
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 149
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455, 457
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . .187, 357
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74, 108, 194
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .178, 194
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370, 371
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Load Shed
Battery Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Battery Saver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Electrical Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Intelligent Battery Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Low Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Maintenance Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . .468, 469, 470, 473, 475
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .183, 415
Manual
Backward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97, 98
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97, 98
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Manual Park Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Manual, Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304, 436, 438
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436, 438
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 149
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84, 85
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
INDEX 495
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Monitor, Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416, 483
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . .363, 462, 464, 465
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417, 462, 464, 465
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460, 461
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417, 418
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417, 418
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422, 462, 464, 465
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419, 460, 461
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419, 420, 460, 461
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Oil Filter, Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . .4, 483
Paint Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Passenger Seat
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . .340, 341
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
10
496 INDEX
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Power Seats
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . .462, 463, 464, 465, 466
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Programmable Electronic Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212, 213
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .11, 13, 20, 22, 29
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Radio (Sound Systems). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Rain Sensitive Wiper System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Rear Cupholder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Recreational Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Reformulated Gasoline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
INDEX 497
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . .13, 18
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . . . .266
Remote Starting
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . .223, 241
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223, 241
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .468, 469, 470, 473
Seat Belt
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 72
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 35, 37
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
10
498 INDEX
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 96, 98
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 98
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14, 178
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . .462, 464, 465
Selection Of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Sentry Key
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Shift Indicator Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74, 108, 194
SiriusXM Guardian
Mobile App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349, 350, 351, 393
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462, 464, 465
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462, 464, 465
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462, 464, 465
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118, 119
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . .116, 117, 120
Sport Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 299
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
INDEX 499
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 115
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 115
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .266
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277, 455
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Sunglasses Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag. . . . . . . . . . .44
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 115
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . .276
Tilt
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 115
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . .340, 341
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74, 345, 349, 356
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340, 345
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392, 395, 398
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345, 349
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392, 394, 395
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340, 341
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
10
500 INDEX
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353, 398
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335, 345
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349, 351, 393
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Tire Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Tire Service Kit. . . . . . . . . . . .383, 384, 385, 387, 389, 390
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Trailer Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438, 463
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308, 309, 437
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437, 462, 463, 464, 465, 466
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30, 31
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108, 194
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . .223, 241
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17, 223, 241
INDEX 501
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Voice Recognition
Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
SiriusXM Guardian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . .222, 240
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222, 240
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222, 240
Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341, 370, 371
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . .14
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277, 455
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419, 420
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111, 112, 428
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Window Fogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111, 112
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Windshield Wipers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Wiper Blade Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
17JC49-126-AA
17D491-126-AB
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
First Edition
Second
Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement